• 19194阅读
  • 233回复

浏览小技巧

级别: 管理员
只看该作者 100 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-11-07 09:25
第十一册 第四课
三、场景学习:
  Ls F. Lst tscvstbttfdwadscstvc. 
    Ihcsvcttcms.wayplntg?lns.ifItkvktfwk,Igtnyct.btftktwkfmvct,Igtep.ylc.Ihnvcttta.btfhawkfmvct,Igtflrd.adfhtwk,itktptmxc.
nlsarpt.
igtnyct
  igtnyct
iftkvctfwk
iftkvkttnyct
iftkvctfwk,igtnyct.
iftkvctfwk,igtnyct.

igtfrld
igtlrrd

  ifhdwkfmvct
ifhdwkfmvct
ifhdwkfmvct
ifhdwktfmvct,igtfrld.
ifhdwktfmvct,igtfrld.

hptfftrcdtnftif"iftkvct"ohpstrlcdtnftif."iftkvct"hvbbsfm,"gtnyct"cbttpttcdtstc.
nyhptfftrcdtnftif"iftkvct"oyhptfpsturcdtnftif:lk"iftkvct."tyhtrttstcwtvbtbsfm,lk"gtnyct."cbttpttstctfmcdtnstc.fexap,yh...
  iftkvct.gtnyct.ads..iftkvct,igtflrd.art,ltbg.

iftkvct.gtnyct.iftkvct,igtnyct.
iftkvct.gtflrd.iftkvct,igtflrs.
ifhengt.vstmfrsstfd.ifhvengt,ivstmfrsstf.
ifhmmn.tkmrtstvct. ifhmmn,itkmrtstvct.
ifdgthg.wttetclcthvdn.ifdgthg,iwttrtclcthvdn.
ifddhvsmcwktd.gttmvwty.ifddhvsmcwktd,igttmvwty.

  四、场景学习:

nlsttcvstntcrsjk.ttkbttnsptsddtstfntct.ntcwtustpsturcdt.
ifyhdtmdsmc,iwdhcbbt.
lscflttetcvstfantrxapltpstrcdt.


ittst.ydlkt.ifyhdsmsmc,iwdhvbbt.bt?bd?iddmtt.isr.itjstt...ifyhtkdbtvltntct,iwdhvbmetst.
wtwstscdxaplftpsturcdt?ifyhtkbttvlftntct,iwdhvbmrtst.

nlsrpt.
ifyhdrmdsmc.
ifyhdtmdsmc.

    ifwdhvbbt.
ifwdhvbbt.
ifyhdtmdsmc,iwshvbbt.
ifyhdtmdsmc,iwshvbbt.
ifyhdtkbttvlftntct.
jfyhdtkbtvlftntct.
iwdhvbmrtst.
iwdhvbmrtst.
ifyhtkdbttvlftntct,iwdhvbmrist.
ifyhdtkdbttclftntct,iwdhvbmrist.

myfithtstc.cbtwstcstostc,uspsturcdtn.fexap,yh...crsddtkbttvlftntct.hstrwsmrtst.adys...ifcrshdtkbttvlftntct,hstrwdhvbmrist.oys...ifjkhdftttofcelng,hcdhvtkttsctrr.ok?ltbg.

crsddgttpfcelng.
ifcrshdtkbttvlftntct,hstrwdhcbmrtst.
jkddgttofcng,hsdhvtkttsctrt.
ifjkhdgtttofcng,hsdhvttsctr.
jkddhvcctasksmpttqst.hddftashndd.
ifjkhdhdcctasksmpttqst,hwdhvgttassndd.
  crswstdhak.scdhjkm.
ifcrshdtstthak,scdhvhpdjkm.
 
nltcgttclssttstdsttwtif,wsttwthtst.frxap,istdsy...ifyhdsmdsmc,iwdhvbbt.ys...iwdhvbbtifyhdsmc.nlsttsxap.yh...rtwslttd.slftthslttusl,adys..rtddetlc.hddhvngt.adys...jkwdhvetlcifhhdnft.art?ltbg.

  jkddetlc.hddhvngt.jkwdhvetlcifhdhdngt.
crscdgwtjk.ststdhak.crscdhvgwtjkifshstsdhak.
tntctwscrdd.itwshld.tntctwdhvbcrdifthdbhld.
wcdgtttntct.wddelng.wcdhvgtnttntctifwdelng.
wddjovct.itrndmstftwk.wwdhvejdouvctifihdrnmstftwk.

 
五、场景学习:
ntedsls,lstcrsssplgzstjkfnbiblthhm.ntchsexpsshrpt
 
ittbdttitstdmak.ifhdhtmakicdhvhpdym...issrmstrddtnotw.itdwtt,btigstsntsgdsihdhpd.

mlsrpt.
itstdmak.
ltstdmak.
ittbd.
ittbd.
ittbdttitstdmak.
ittbdttitstdmak.
mstrddtnotw.
mstrddtnotw.
issr
issr.
issrmstrddtnotw.
issrmstrddtnotw.

nygithstcbtstttmksyexpsrgt.tyhscuwd-ettbd,ssr,opt.ustwdnstsbget"ittbd","issr","oitpt"fexap,yh...

mstsltzjslfttbd,ddysh?tbd.ays...n.ittbdiddsh.oyh...iwstdmak.ssr.ays...issrywstdyak.ok?ltbg.

msslrzjslfttbd.ddysh?tbd.n.lttbdiddsh.iwstdmak.ssr.issrytstdyak.
ddytknptslsgls?pt.n.iddtknptslsgls.
mmtsvrsc.ssr.issrymtsvrsk.
ifldmeglsxm.tbd.ittbdyfldyeglsecm.
ifgtttkmcmrmvct.pt.itptyfgtttkycmryvct.
  iddnbttcctttnxtd.tbd.ittbdyddnbttcctttnxtd.

tsdedflsf. 

整个第四课互动磁带心念压码注音结束。


sunyuting1 2007-11-07 16:06
   
第十一册 第五课

一、基本词组:

wish的过去、现在、将来时态用法

I wish
  I could tell you.
  I just wish
  you could tell me

1、use  the verb wish and a past tense
  simple past tense to say what  that person wishes:

as they talk about a problem
how many times
spend so much time
keep any  secrets
it soon enough
surprised at me
honest with each other
our relationship was  based on love

working on
Why do you ...
What are you...
  What is this....you  won't tell me about
  I wish I could tell you
I wish  I didn't have to
But I really  can't tell you about ...
I'm sorry. You'll know  about ,,,
.I'm  surprised at ...
  Why are you ...
  Because I thought we were ....
  . I  thought ...
respect, and  trust.
I'm sorry. I just wish you could tell me.

the simple past tense
have to keep  secrets

Now you're going to hear ....
Use  the verb wish and a verb...
in ...to say what  that ... wishes.
For example,
  you hear . . .  can't tell ....  And you say . . .  .wishes he could ...  Or you hear . . .:  He has to keep ....  And you say . . .:  He wishes he didn't ...from her. 

go with Jake to
can't tell ...  wishes he could tell ....
  He has to  ....  He wishes he didn't have to.....
  They have to....  They wish they didn't have to....
  can't go ... wishes she could go ....
  She doesn't know how to do ....  She wishes she knew how to do ....
has....    wishes he didn't have ....

2、how often they use wish  and a verb in the past perfect  tense

Now listen to this conversation between ...
They're  talking about....

  I wish I hadn't today. 
    Are you still ...
    I'm starving.
    There's nothing  .
    I wish I had ... on a roll with ...
      mustard and may on ....
    I wish I had known.
    I  wouldn't have eaten  everything.
  started my  diet
  left in here
    packed a huge turkey  sandwich
    naise and  lettuce and tomato  and cheese


    I hadn't
    I wish
    I wish I hadn't
    a huge turkey sandwich
    I wish I had packed .....

  I wish I had known.
  I wouldn't have
  eaten  everything.

  Now you're going to hear .... 
    Say what ..wish,
      using the past perfect tense.
      For  example, you hear. . .
      had to ....  And you say. . .
        wishes he hadn't had to
      Or you hear. . .
      started her diet .  And you say. . .
        wishes she hadn't started
      her diet today. 

  had to work ...
    wishes he hadn't had to ....
    started her diet
    wishes she hadn't started  .
    didn't pack a huge turkey  sandwich.
      wishes she had packed ....
      didn't know about ...
    wishes he had known  about....,
      thought about...
    wishes she hadn't thought about
    told everyone she was ...
  .  She wishes she hadn't told ...
      she was quitting her  job.

3、
Now you're going to hear...
talking about things that 
will happen in the future,
or that have already happened
in the  past.


  I'm sorry I have to go back to
    She wishes she didn't have to go back ...
  I'm sorry I had to ...
  He wishes he hadn't had to

  I'm sorry I have to....
  She wishes she didn't have to ...
  He wishes he hadn't had to....
  It's too bad I don't have time ...
  She wishes she had time....
  It's a pity I started ...
  He wishes he hadn't started his ....
  I'm very sorry I lost that ...
  She wishes she hadn't lost that  ...
  What a pity I can't go to ...
  He wishes he could go to ...
  It's too bad I didn't know that  ...
  She wishes she'd known that  ...
  I'm sorry I won't be able to...
    He wishes he could ....
  It's too bad he had to ...
  She wishes he hadn't had to ....   
I'm sorry I'll have to ....
  He wishes he didn't have to....


二、基本句子:
I wish I didn't have to keep any secrets from you.
I just wish you could tell me.
wish I had packed a huge  turkey sandwich
I wouldn't have eaten everything.


1、use  the verb wish and a past tense,,
simple past tense to say wishes:


I wish I didn't have to keep any secrets from you.
I just wish you could tell me.

Terry can't tell Rita his secret.  Terry wishes he could tell Rita  his secret.
  He has to keep secrets from her.  He wishes he didn't have to keep secrets from her.
  They have to go back to work.  They wish they didn't have to go  back to work.
  Chris can't go with Jake to the  Nature Center.  Chris wishes she could go with  Jake to the Nature Center.
  She doesn't know how to do a  good interview.  She wishes she knew how to do a  good interview.
  Jake has a lot of work to do  today.  Jake wishes he didn't have a lot  of work to do today.


2、how often they use wish  and a verb in the past perfect  tense:

I wish I had packed a huge  turkey sandwich
I wouldn't have eaten everything.


Terry had to work this morning.  Terry  wishes he hadn't had to  work this morning.
  Rita started her diet today.  Rita wishes she hadn't started  her diet today.
  She didn't pack a huge turkey  sandwich.  She wishes she had packed a  huge turkey sandwich.
  Terry didn't know about Rita's  diet.  Terry wishes he had known  about Rita's diet,
  Rita thought about retiring.  Rita wishes she hadn't thought about retiring.
She told everyone she was quitting her  job.  She wishes she hadn't told  everyone she was quitting her  job.

3、will happen in the future, or that have already happened in the  past:


  I'm sorry I have to go back to my office later this afternoon. 
  She wishes she didn't have to go back to her office later this  afternoon. 

  I'm sorry I had to work last  Sunday. 
  He wishes he hadn't had to work  last Sunday

  I'm sorry I have to go back to my office later this afternoon. She wishes she didn't have to go  back to her office later this  afternoon.
  I'm sorry I had to work last  Sunday.  He wishes he hadn't had to work last Sunday.
  It's too bad I don't have time to  go to the movies tonight.  She wishes she had time to go to  the movies tonight.
  It's a pity I started my diet last  week.  He wishes he hadn't started his  diet last week.
  I'm very sorry I lost that library  book.  She wishes she hadn't lost that  library book.
  What a pity I can't go to Ed's  party next week.  He wishes he could go to Ed's  party next week.
  It's too bad I didn't know that  Sam was arriving.  She wishes she'd known that  Sam was arriving.
  I'm sorry I won't be able to accept her invitation.  He wishes he could accept her  invitation.
  It's too bad he had to work on his  birthday.  She wishes he hadn't had to work on his birthday.   
I'm sorry I'll have to miss the concert. He wishes he didn't have to miss the concert.

三、场景学习:

simple past tense to say what  that person wishes

1、引导语:

  Welcome to Lesson Five. Listen to Rita and Terry as they talk about a problem in their relationship.  Notice how many times they use  the verb wish and a past tense.

2、情景:

Why do you spend so much time in the editing room? What are you working on?  What is this project you  won't tell me about?  I wish I could tell you. I wish    I didn't have to keep any  secrets from you. But I really  can't tell you about this,  Rita. I'm sorry. You'll know    about it soon enough. I'm  surprised at you.  Why are you surprised at me?  Because I thought we were  honest with each other. I  thought our relationship was  based on love, respect, and  trust.  You're right. I'm sorry. I just wish you could tell me.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  I could tell you
  I wish
  I wish I could tell you.
  I wish I could tell you.
  keep any secrets from you
  I wish I didn't have to keep
  I wish I didn't have to keep any secrets from you.
  I wish I didn't have to keep any secrets from you.

  you could tell me
  I just wish
  I just wish you could tell me.
  I just wish you could tell me.

4、引导学习:

  Now you're going to hear a  sentence about someone. Use  the verb wish and a verb in the simple past tense to say what  that person wishes. For example,
  you hear . . .  Terry can't tell Rita his secret.  And you say . . .  Terry wishes he could tell Rita  his secret.  Or you hear . . .:  He has to keep secrets from her.  And you say . . .:  He wishes he didn't have to keep  secrets from her.  All right. Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Terry can't tell Rita his secret.  Terry wishes he could tell Rita  his secret.
  He has to keep secrets from her.  He wishes he didn't have to keep secrets from her.
  They have to go back to work.  They wish they didn't have to go  back to work.
  Chris can't go with Jake to the  Nature Center.  Chris wishes she could go with  Jake to the Nature Center.
  She doesn't know how to do a  good interview.  She wishes she knew how to do a  good interview.
  Jake has a lot of work to do  today.  Jake wishes he didn't have a lot  of work to do today.

四、场景学习:
  verb in the past perfect  tense
  past perfect tense:

1、引导语:

  Now listen to this conversation between Rita and Terry. They're  talking about Rita's new diet.  Notice how often they use wish  and a verb in the past perfect  tense.

2、情景:

  I wish I hadn't started my  diet today.  Why? Are you still hungry?  I'm starving. There's nothing  left in here. I wish I had  packed a huge turkey  sandwich on a roll with mustard and may on naise and  lettuce and tomato  and cheese.  I wish I had known. I  wouldn't have eaten  everything.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  I hadn't started my diet today
  I wish
  I wish I hadn't started my diet  today.
  I wish I hadn't started my diet today.
  a huge turkey sandwich
  I had packed a huge turkey sandwich
  I wish I had packed a huge  turkey sandwich.
  I wish I had packed a huge  turkey sandwich.

  I wish I had known.
  I wish I had known.
  I wouldn't have eaten  everything.
  I wouldn't have eaten everything.

4、引导学习:

  Now you're going to hear some sentences about different people.  Say what those people wish, using the past perfect tense. For  example, you hear. . .
  Terry had to work this morning.  And you say. . .  Terry wishes he hadn't had to  work this morning.  Or you hear. . . Rita started her diet today.  And you say. . .  Rita wishes she hadn't started
  her diet today.  All right. Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Terry had to work this morning.  Terry wishes he hadn't had to  work this morning.
  Rita started her diet today.  Rita wishes she hadn't started  her diet today.
  She didn't pack a huge turkey  sandwich.  She wishes she had packed a  huge turkey sandwich.
  Terry didn't know about Rita's  diet.  Terry wishes he had known  about Rita's diet,
  Rita thought about retiring.  Rita wishes she hadn't thought about retiring.
She told everyone she was quitting her  job.  She wishes she hadn't told  everyone she was quitting her  job.

五、场景学习:

will happen in the future, or that have already happened in the  past.

1、引导语:

  Now you're going to hear sev'eral people talking about things that  will happen in the future, or that have already happened in the  past. Listen to how they express  regret. For example, you
  hear.. .

2、引导学习:

  I'm sorry I have to go back to my office later this afternoon.  And you say . . .  She wishes she didn't have to go back to her office later this  afternoon.  Or you hear. . . I'm sorry I had to work last  Sunday.  And you say . . .  He wishes he hadn't had to work  last Sunday. OK? Let's begin.

3、练习:

  I'm sorry I have to go back to my office later this afternoon. She wishes she didn't have to go  back to her office later this  afternoon.
  I'm sorry I had to work last  Sunday.  He wishes he hadn't had to work last Sunday.
  It's too bad I don't have time to  go to the movies tonight.  She wishes she had time to go to  the movies tonight.
  It's a pity I started my diet last  week.  He wishes he hadn't started his  diet last week.
  I'm very sorry I lost that library  book.  She wishes she hadn't lost that  library book.
  What a pity I can't go to Ed's  party next week.  He wishes he could go to Ed's  party next week.
  It's too bad I didn't know that  Sam was arriving.  She wishes she'd known that  Sam was arriving.
  I'm sorry I won't be able to accept her invitation.  He wishes he could accept her  invitation.
  It's too bad he had to work on his  birthday.  She wishes he hadn't had to work on his birthday.   
I'm sorry I'll have to miss the concert. He wishes he didn't have to miss the concert.

And that's the end of Lesson Five.


sunyuting1 2007-11-07 18:05
最新贴


sunyuting1 2007-11-08 14:42
                  第十一册 复习二

一、基本词组:

1、would have been able to :
to do if
  to  meet
  to see
  to  taste
  to dance
  to go if
  You would
  She would
  Who would
  How would
  Where would
  What would

  invited Chris to ...,
  but she arrives late. Listen to ...
  she would have been able
  to do if she had arrived on time. 

  I'm so sorry I'm late.
  I had some trouble with ...
  Then I got lost.
  And on ....
  I hurt ...
  Is the party ...
  still going on
  I'm sorry to hear all that.
  but the last  guest just left.
  It's too bad you didn't get ....
  What did I miss
    If you'd been here,
    you would have been able to meet  .....
    How do you know them
    They're old friends of mine. 
    you would have been  able to ...with.... 
    always visit me when ....
  Now I know you're lying. 
  You're making....
    this whole thing up! 
    That's true.
    But it's also true  that
    if you'd been on time,
    you  would have been able to  ....   
    Now I'm really sorry I was late. 
    Because of my cooking  or because of Jake
    Because of both, I guess. 

    you would have been able to
    meet some famous people
    meet  dancing with Barbara
    taste my cooking 
    dance with Jake Seltzer 

    you're going to hear
  aquestion and a cue.
    Use the cue to answer ...
    using the  words
    would have been able to in...
    "What would ...have  been able to
    do if she'd arrived ..."
    Meet some famous people.. . .
    She would have been able to  meet ...
    "Who would Chris have been able to see ...with"
    She would have been able to see..with ....

  What would...have been able to do    if she'd arrived at...on  time
  Meet some famous people.

 
  would have been able to

  She would have been able to ....
  .....meet some famous people.
    Who would ......
  .....see Mike dancing with.Barbara.
  She would ....
    Where would ...go
    if she'd had ... Paris.
    She would ....
  .....to go to Paris.
    How would ....
.......to travel if she'd had ....
  ......travel on the Concorde.
    Who would ....
      .... meet if he'd been....The President. 
        He would .....
      meet the President.
      What would .....
      do if they'd won .....
      Quit their jobs.
      They would ...
      quit their jobs.

2
You're going to hear a short  talk about

  Hello. And welcome to the
  I'm your tour guide,
Before we begin our tour
let me tell you a little about ....
It celebrated its....birthday in....
The founder was ...
a prominent Stamford surgeon.
If ...hadn't been involved,
..would have been just a collection
What started as ...in ...has grown to..on ...in the ...
Now if you just follow me
the tour will begin.


  Now take ..and get ready to write.
When you hear...
the tour guide again,
write down ...
the most important .. she says.
Don't write every word,
though,
just the important details.
  There will be ...for you to write

  What is .name...    Lisa Horn.   
  In what year ....    In 1986.   
  What was the name ..who founded ...  Dr. G. R. Hertzberg.   
  What was ...  He was a surgeon.   
  If ..hadn't been ..., what would ..have been..  Just a collection.   
  How many rooms... start out with...  Three.   
  Where were ..located...  In a downtown office building.   
    How many ..  Five.   
  How many acres are.. Eighty.

二、基本句子:

You would have been able to  meet some famous people.

1、You would have been able to  meet :

  You would have been able to  meet some famous people.
    You would have been able to see  me dancing with Barbara. 
    You would have been able to taste my cooking. 
    You would have been able to dance with Jake Seltzer.

  What would Chris have been able to do if she'd arrived at Mike's party on  time?
  Meet some famous people.

  She would have been able to meet some famous people.
    Who would Chris have been able to see Mike dancing with?Barbara.
  She would have been able to see Mike  dancing with Barbara. 
    Where would Rita have been able to go if she'd had enough vacation time? Paris.  She would have been able to go to Paris.
    How would she have been able to travel if she'd had enough money? On the Concorde. She would have been able to travel on the Concorde.
    Who would Jake have been able to meet if he'd been invited to a White House dinner?The President. 
    He would have been able to meet the President.
    What would Rita and Terry have been able to do if they'd won lots of money in the lottery?  Quit their jobs.  They would have been able to quit their jobs.

2、Question :
    What is the tour guide's name?    Lisa Horn.   
  In what year did the museum  celebrate its fiftieth birthday?    In 1986.   
  What was the name of the man  who founded it?  Dr. G. R. Hertzberg.   
  What was Dr. Hertzberg's  profession?  He was a surgeon.   
  If Dr. Hertzberg hadn't been  involved, what would the museum have been?  Just a collection.   
  How many rooms did the  museum start out with?  Three.   
  Where were the rooms located?    In a downtown office building.   
    How many buildings are there  now?    Five.   
  How many acres are there now?  Eighty.



三、场景学习:

1、引导语:
Review Two. For  this lesson, you'll need a pencil  and a piece of paper.  Listen to this conversation. Mike  invited Chris to his party, but she arrives late. Listen to all the things she would have been able to do if she had arrived on time. 

2、情景

Oh, Mike! I'm so sorry I'm late. I had some trouble with my car. Then I got lost. And on my way upstairs, I hurt my leg. Again. Is the party still going on?  Poor Chris! I'm sorry to hear all that. Here, come and sit down. I'm sorry, but the last  guest just left. It's too bad you didn't get here a little sooner.Why? What happened? What did I miss?    If you'd been here, you would have been able to meet  some famous people.  Tom Cruise and Madonna were  here. Really? Both of them? How do you know them?  They're old friends of mine.    And you would have been  able to see me dancing with    Barbara.  Barbara who?    Barbara Bush! She and George always visit me when  they're in Stamford.      Now I know you're lying.    You're making this whole  thing up!  That's true. But it's also true  that if you'd been on time, you would have been able to  taste my cooking. And you  would have been able to  dance with Jake Seltzer.    Now I'm really sorry I was late.  Why? Because of my cooking  or because of Jake?    Because of both, I guess. 

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  meet some famous people
  you would have been able to  meet
  You would have been able to  meet some famous people.
  You would have been able to meet some famous people.

  dancing with Barbara
  you would have been able to see  me
  You would have been able to see me dancing with Barbara. 
  You would have been able to see  me dancing with Barbara.

  taste my cooking 
  you would have been able to  taste
  You would have been able to taste my cooking.
  You would have been able to taste my cooking. 

  dance with Jake Seltzer 
  you would have been able to  dance
  You would have been able to dance with Jake Seltzer.
  You would have been able to  dance with Jake Seltzer.

4、引导学习:


  Now you're going to hear aquestion and a cue. Use the cue to answer the question, using the  words would have been able to in your sentence. For example, you  hear, "What would Chris have  been able to do if she'd arrived at Mike's party on time?"  Meet some famous people.And you say . . .
    She would have been able to  meet some famous people. Or you hear, "Who would Chris have been able to see Mike  dancing with?" Barbara.  And you say . . .She would have been able to see Mike dancing with Barbara. OK? Let's begin.

5、练习:

  What would Chris have been able to do if she'd arrived at Mike's party on  time?  Meet some famous people.

  She would have been able to meet some famous people.
    Who would Chris have been able to see Mike dancing with?Barbara.
  She would have been able to see Mike  dancing with Barbara. 
    Where would Rita have been able to go if she'd had enough vacation time? Paris.  She would have been able to go to Paris.
    How would she have been able to travel if she'd had enough money? On the Concorde. She would have been able to travel on the Concorde.
    Who would Jake have been able to meet if he'd been invited to a White House dinner?The President. 
He would have been able to meet the President.
What would Rita and Terry have been able to do if they'd won lots of money in the lottery?  Quit their jobs.  They would have been able to quit their jobs.

四、场景学习:

1、引导语:

      Now take your pencil and a piece of paper.  You're going to hear a short  talk about the early years of the Stamford Museum and Nature Center. The first time you hear it, don't write anything. Just listen.

2、情景:

    Hello. And welcome to the Stamford Museum and Nature Center. I'm your tour guide, Lisa Hom. Before we begin our tour, let me tell you a little about the history of the museum. It celebrated its fiftieth birthday in 1986. The founder was Dr.G. R. Hertzberg, a prominent Stamford surgeon. If Dr. Hertzberg hadn't been involved, the museum would have been just a collection.  What started as three rooms in a downtown office building has grown to five buildings on eighty acres in the northern part of the city.  Now if you just follow me,  the tour will begin.

3、引导学习:

    Now take your pencil and a piece of paper and get ready to write.  When you hear the tour guide again, write down the most important things she says. Don't write every word, though, just the important details.  There will be some pauses for you to write.All right. Let's begin.

4、重复情景:

    Hello. And welcome to the Stamford Museum and Nature Center. I'm your  tour guide, LIsa Horn. tell you a little about the history  of the museum. It celebrated its  fiftieth birthday in 1986. The founder was Dr. G. R. Hertzberg, a prominent Stamford If Dr. Hertzberg hadn't been  involved, the museum would  have been just a collection.  What started as three rooms in a  downtown office building  has grown to five buildings on conversation.  eighty acres  in the northern part of the city.  Now if you just follow me, the tour will begin.   

5、回答问题练习:

Now use your paper to answer
Question One.    What is the tour guide's name?    Lisa Horn.   
Question Two.  In what year did the museum  celebrate its fiftieth birthday?    In 1986.   
Question Three.  What was the name of the man  who founded it?  Dr. G. R. Hertzberg.   
Question Four.  What was Dr. Hertzberg's  profession?  He was a surgeon.   
Question Five.  If Dr. Hertzberg hadn't been  involved, what would the museum have been?  Just a collection.   
Question Six.    How many rooms did the    museum start out with?  Three.   
Question Seven.  Where were the rooms located?    In a downtown office building.   
Question Eight.    How many buildings are there  now?    Five.   
Question Nine.  How many acres are there now?  Eighty.
Question Ten.  Where is the museum located? In the northern part of the city.   

  This is the end of Review Two.
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 101 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-11-09 11:41
第十一册第五课

基本句子、基本词组反向提前压码替换练习(wish 时态)
总结:
1、I wish I,He wishes he ,She wishes she ,She wishes he , They wish they ,
2、past perfect  tense:

  Terry can't tell---Terry wishes he ---
  They ---They wish they
      Chris ---Chris wishes she
      She---She wishes she
      Jake ---Jake wishes he
      He --- He wishes he

  can't ----could
      has to --didn't have to
    have to ---didn't have to
    doesn't know --- knew
    has ---didn't have

3、past perfect tense:

  Terry ---Terry  wishes he
      Rita --- Rita wishes she
      She --- She wishes she
    Terry---Terry wishes he
      Rita ---Rita wishes she
      She --- She wishes she

    had ---hadn't had
    started--- hadn't started 
    didn't pack --- had packed
    didn't know ---had known 
    thought ---hadn't thought
    told --- hadn't told 

4、future, or past:

    I'm sorry I---He wishes he
        I'm sorry I ---She wishes she
        I'm sorry I---He wishes he
        It's too bad I ---She wishes she
        It's a pity I --- He wishes
        I'm very sorry I ---She wishes she
      What a pity I---He wishes he
      It's too bad I ---She wishes she'd
      I'm sorry I---He wishes he
      It's too bad he ---She wishes he
      I'm sorry I'll --- He wishes he

      had--- hadn't had
      have to --- didn't have to
      had to ---hadn't had to
      don't have ---had
      started--- hadn't started
      lost ---hadn't lost
      can't go to ---could go to
      didn't know --- known
      won't be able to ---could 
    had to ---hadn't had to
    have to --- didn't have to

基本句型:

I wish I didn't have to keep any secrets from you.
I just wish you could tell me.

wish I had packed a huge  turkey sandwich
I wouldn't have eaten everything.

Terry can't tell Rita his secret.  Terry wishes he could tell Rita  his secret.
Terry had to work this morning.  Terry  wishes he hadn't had to  work this morning.
I'm sorry I had to work last  Sunday.  He wishes he hadn't had to work  last Sunday


句子原形、替换wish句型与替换单词词组对照:

1、use  the verb wish and a past tense:

I wish I didn't have to keep any secrets from you.
I just wish you could tell me.

Terry can't tell Rita his secret.  Terry wishes he could tell Rita  his secret.
Terry can't tell 。。。Terry wishes he 。。。
can't ----could
  He has to keep secrets from her.  He wishes he didn't have to keep secrets from her.
He --- He wishes he
has to --didn't have to
  They have to go back to work.  They wish they didn't have to go  back to work.
They 。。。 They wish they
have to 。。。didn't have to
  Chris can't go with Jake to the  Nature Center.  Chris wishes she could go with  Jake to the Nature Center.
Chris ---Chris wishes she
can't --- could
  She doesn't know how to do a  good interview.  She wishes she knew how to do a  good interview.
She---She wishes she
doesn't know --- knew
  Jake has a lot of work to do  today.  Jake wishes he didn't have a lot  of work to do today.
Jake ---Jake wishes he
has ---didn't have


2、how often they use wish  and a verb in the past perfect  tense:

I wish I had packed a huge  turkey sandwich
I wouldn't have eaten everything.


Terry had to work this morning.  Terry  wishes he hadn't had to  work this morning.
Terry ---Terry  wishes he
had ---hadn't had
  Rita started her diet today.  Rita wishes she hadn't started  her diet today.
Rita --- Rita wishes she
started--- hadn't started 
  She didn't pack a huge turkey  sandwich.  She wishes she had packed a  huge turkey sandwich.
She --- She wishes she
didn't pack --- had packed
  Terry didn't know about Rita's  diet.  Terry wishes he had known  about Rita's diet,
Terry---Terry wishes he
didn't know ---had known 
  Rita thought about retiring.  Rita wishes she hadn't thought about retiring.
Rita ---Rita wishes
thought ---hadn't thought
She told everyone she was quitting her  job.  She wishes she hadn't told  everyone she was quitting her  job.
She --- She wishes she
told --- hadn't told 

3、will happen in the future, or that have already happened in the  past:


I'm sorry I have to go back to my office later this afternoon. 
  She wishes she didn't have to go back to her office later this  afternoon. 

  I'm sorry I had to work last  Sunday.  He wishes he hadn't had to work  last Sunday
I'm sorry I---He wishes he
had--- hadn't had
  I'm sorry I have to go back to my office later this afternoon. She wishes she didn't have to go  back to her office later this  afternoon.
I'm sorry I ---She wishes she
have to --- didn't have to
  I'm sorry I had to work last  Sunday.  He wishes he hadn't had to work last Sunday.
I'm sorry I---He wishes he
had to ---hadn't had to
  It's too bad I don't have time to  go to the movies tonight.  She wishes she had time to go to  the movies tonight.
It's too bad I ---She wishes she
don't have ---had
  It's a pity I started my diet last  week.  He wishes he hadn't started his  diet last week.
It's a pity I --- He wishes
started--- hadn't started
  I'm very sorry I  lost that library  book.  She wishes she hadn't lost that  library book.
  I'm very sorry I ---She wishes she
lost ---hadn't lost
  What a pity I can't go to Ed's  party next week.  He wishes he could go to Ed's  party next week.
What a pity I---He wishes he
can't go to ---could go to
  It's too bad I didn't know that  Sam was arriving.  She wishes she'd known that  Sam was arriving.
It's too bad I ---She wishes she'd
didn't know --- known
  I'm sorry I won't be able to accept her invitation.  He wishes he could accept her  invitation.
I'm sorry I---He wishes he
won't be able to ---could
  It's too bad he had to work on his  birthday.  She wishes he hadn't had to work on his birthday.   
It's too bad he ---She wishes he
had to ---hadn't had to
I'm sorry I'll have to miss the concert. He wishes he didn't have to miss the concert.
I'm sorry I'll --- He wishes he
have to --- didn't have to


sunyuting1 2007-11-10 19:52
总结:
1、对于第五课的wish时态句子变换可以采用句子之间单词差别整理解决;
2、对于复习二的理解和信息记忆可以采用一边听互动磁带语音,一边看课文《阅读与复习》的内容扩大相关信息的理解能力,从而达到互动磁带文本的篇章记忆压码能力;
3、对于一般课文的理解记忆难度较大的互动磁带文本语音内容,都可以采用课文阅读或者看光盘加快理解记忆的能力,遇到理解记忆难度大的时候,不要在一个磁带语音浪费较长时间,经常变换一下学习方式就理解可以解决;
4、理解以后练习压码听懂效率较高,这个时候要按照压码听懂的要领彻底整体篇章压码彻底听懂为止。最好经过一次磨练耳朵的过程,听着语音睡一觉以后再巩固效果更好;
5、整理课文文本可以先整理再练习压码听懂,练习完毕再进行修改整理总结,就可以将听懂的内容系通理解压码记忆。


sunyuting1 2007-11-10 22:11
第十一册第六课

一、基本词组if 从句:

if  he hadn't been ...he wouldn't  have  ,
  What does she wish she ...so.(in such)...  She wishes she were ...so...

1、 If he hadn't been 。。。he  wouldn't have:

I guess  ,I didn't  ,I guess ,hadn't been ,wouldn't  have ,hadn't missed,


  Welcome to ......, you'll need a....  Listen to ...between...after .... Notice how ...conditions, like this one. . .  If...hadn't played so badly,    he wouldn't have .... OK, let's listen to ...

      Oh, Marisa! Hi there.
    I didn't  know you were ...
    How did you...
    I didn't like....
    I guess you're,,,
    Boris just didn't do....
  Maybe if he hadn't been ...
    he wouldn't  have ...
    if he hadn't been ...
    he wouldn't have ....
  one thing is sure.
    If he hadn't missed....,
    he wouldn't have...
    if he hadn't ...,
    he wouldn't have  ....   
    You win some,
    you  lose some.

    you were coming to the  match.
    did you like it
    not happy with the  way
    it ended for Boris. 
    Boris just didn't do
      his  best today. 
    in such  poor condition,
    gotten so tired.
      so  tired,
      missed  those important shots.
      missed those shots,
      gotten so angry  with himself.
      lost the game.   

  he wouldn't have
    gotten so tired 
    if he hadn't been
    in such poor condition,
    missed those important shots   
  hadn't been so tired,
  missed thos  important shots.
  gotten so angry wIth himself 
    if he hadn't
    missed those shots
    he wouldn't have
  gotten so angry  with himself.
 
    make sentences
    using  negatives
    in the past unreal  conditional.
    You'll hear
      two sentences.
      The first sentence
      will  become your
        if clause,
      second will become
      the result  clause

    Boris was
    in poor physical  condition
  He got tired.
  .If Boris hadn't been
    in poor  physical condition,
    he wouldn't have
    gotten tired.
    He missed
    some of his shots.
    He  got angry
    at himself
    If he hadn't
    missed some of his  shots,
    he wouldn't have
    gotten  angry at himself

    Boris was
    in poor physical condition.
    He got tired.
    If Boris hadn't been
    in poor  physical condition,
    he wouldn't have
    gotten tired.
    He missed
    some of his shots.
    He  got angry at himself. 
    If he hadn't missed
    some of his  shots,
    he wouldn't have
  gotten  angry at himself.
  He got angry
  at himself.
  He served badly. 
    If he hadn't
    gotten angry at  himself,
  he wouldn't have
  served  badly.
  He served badly.
    He lost the  game.
    If he hadn't
    served badly,
  he  wouldn't have
  lost the game.
  He lost the game.
  He decided to
    get into better shape.
    If he hadn't
    lost the game,
    the  wouldn't have
    decided to get  into better shape.

2、What does she wish she ...so.(in such)...  She wishes she were ...so...

    Now take .... You're going to ...things that ... Don't write ..., just  listen.
    I still have ....  I want to be ..., like....  I'd like to  be able..... I'm sorry I didn't ... before.... I  also want to be able..., like....  . most of all,  I'm sorry.... Now I  have to.... I hate that.

Now take .... You're going to hear....  This time...,  so write .... There will be ...after ...

    I still have
        so many things to  learn.
        I want to be
      a good reporter,
        like Jake.
        I'd like to be able
      to interview people
        in an interesting way.
        I'm sorry I didn't learn 
        more about  journalism
        before I started working at  WEFL .
        I also want to be able 
        to edit quickly,
        like Roger  Ward.
        And most of all,
        I'm sorry I twisted my ankle.
        Now I have to work at a desk  all day.
        I hate that.

    now listen ..for .... This  time,    check ...to see... if you can ...and  correct

    I still have ... I want to be ..,  like ... I'd like to  be able....I'm sorry I didn't  ... before .....I also want to be able...,  like ....  And most of all, I'm sorry.... Now I  have to ... I hate that.

    Now use...to answer ...questions. Make sure that ...verb wish ...answers.

    What does ...
  crise  wish she were
    She wishes she were
    a good  reporter, like Jake. 
  What does she wish
    she could  do
  She wishes she
  could interview  people
  in an interesting way. 

    What does
  Chris wish she were
    She wishes she were
    a good  reporter, like Jake.
      What does she wish
  she could  do
    She wishes she could
    interview  people in an interesting way.
      What does she wish
    she had  done before she started working  at WEFL
    She wishes she had
    learned more about journalism.
    What does she wish
    she could do  quickly
  She wishes she could
  edit  quickly, like Roger Ward.
  What does she wish
  she hadn't  done
    She wishes she
    hadn't twisted  her ankle.
  And I wish we
  didn't have to go  on to the next lesson.
  But we do.
  And that's the end ...


二、基本句子:

If he hadn't been so tired, he  wouldn't have missed those  important shots. 

What does Chris wish she were?    She wishes she were a good  reporter, like Jake. 


1、 If he hadn't been 。。。he  wouldn't have:

If he hadn't been so tired, he  wouldn't have missed those  important shots. 
  If he hadn't missed those shots,  he wouldn't have gotten so angry  with himself.

  Boris was in poor physical  condition .He got tired.
  If Boris hadn't been in poor  physical condition, he wouldn't have gotten tired.

  He missed some of his shots. He  got angry at himself.
  If he hadn't missed some of his  shots, he wouldn't have gotten  angry at himself.

  Boris was in poor physical condition.  He got tired.  If Boris hadn't been in poor  physical condition, he wouldn't have gotten tired.
  He missed some of his shots. He  got angry at himself.  If he hadn't missed some of his  shots, he wouldn't have gotten  angry at himself.
  He got angry at himself. He served badly.    If he hadn't gotten angry at  himself, he wouldn't have served  badly.
  He served badly. He lost the  game. If he hadn't served badly, he  wouldn't have lost the game.
  He lost the game. He decided to get into better shape. If he hadn't lost the game, the  wouldn't have decided to get  into better shape.

2、  Question  ----What does she wish she ....(were,could do, had done, sould do quikly,hadn't done  ):


      What does Chris wish she were? 
      She wishes she were a good  reporter, like Jake. 

        I still have so many things to  learn.  I want to be a good  reporter, like Jake.  I'd like to  be able to interview people  in an interesting way. I'm sorry I didn't learn more  about journalism before I started working at WEFL. I  also want to be able to edit  quickly, like Roger Ward.  And most of all,  I'm sorry I twisted my ankle. Now I  have to work at a desk all  day. I hate that.


      What does she wish she could  do? 
      She wishes she could interview  people in an interesting way.  All right. Let's begin.

    Question  :
      What does Chris wish she were?    She wishes she were a good  reporter, like Jake.
      What does she wish she could  do?    She wishes she could interview  people in an interesting way.
      What does she wish she had  done before she started working  at WEFL?  She wishes she had learned more about journalism.
  What does she wish she could do  quickly?  She wishes she could edit  quickly, like Roger Ward.
What does she wish she hadn't  done? She wishes she hadn't twisted  her ankle.

  And I wish we didn't have to go  on to the next lesson. But we do.  And that's the end of Lesson Six.


三、场景学习how tennis fans  conditions  if  he  hadn't....  he wouldn't have ...:

1、引导语:

  Welcome to Lesson Six. For this  lesson, you'll need a pencil and a piece of paper.  Listen to this conversation  between two tennis fans  discussing a tennis player after a match . Notice how tennis fans  conditions, like this one. . .  If John hadn't played so badly,    he wouldn't have lost the game. OK, let's listen to their  conversation. 
 

2、情景
  Notice how tennis fans  conditions ,
    If John hadn't ...,    he wouldn't have ...:

    Oh, Marisa! Hi there. I didn't  know you were coming to the  match. How did you like it? I didn't like it.  I guess you're not happy with the  way it ended for Boris.  That's right. Boris just didn't do his  best today.  Maybe if he hadn't been in such  poor condition, he wouldn't  have gotten so tired. Yes. And if he hadn't been so  tired, he wouldn't have missed  those important shots.  Well, one thing is sure. If he hadn't missed those shots, he wouldn't have gotten so angry  with himself.    And if he hadn't gotten so angry  with himself, he wouldn't have  lost the game.    Oh, well. You win some, you  lose some.
 
3、学习
if he hadn't been(  have ) so( in such )....he wouldn't have  .... gotten so ( missed those , )...:

  Now listen and repeat. 

    he wouldn't have gotten so tired 
    if he hadn't been in such poor condition,
    If he hadn't been in such poor condition,  he wouldn't have  gotten so tired.
    If he hadn't been in such poor condition,  he wouldn't have  gotten so tired.

    he wouldn't have missed those important shots   
    If he hadn't been so tired,
    If he hadn't been so tired,  he  wouldn't have missed those  important shots.
    If he hadn't been so tired, he  wouldn't have missed those  important shots. 

  he wouldn't have gotten so angry wIth himself 
    if he hadn't missed those shots
    If he hadn't missed those shots, he wouldn't have gotten so angry  with himself.
    If he hadn't missed those shots,  he wouldn't have gotten so angry  with himself.

4、引导学习
make sentences using  negatives in the past unreal  conditional,first sentence if clause.(If he hadn't  ) , second  become  result  clause (he wouldn't have ):

  Now make sentences using  negatives in the past unreal  conditional. You'll hear two sentences. The first sentence will  become your if clause, and the  second will become the result  clause. For example, you  hear. . .

    Boris was in poor physical  condition .He got tired.  And you say. .    .If Boris hadn't been in poor  physical condition, he wouldn't have gotten tired. Or you hear. . . He missed some of his shots. He  got angry at himself.and you say。。。 If he hadn't missed some of his  shots, he wouldn't have gotten  angry at himself. All right. Let's begin.

5、连环因果关系练习
If Boris hadn't (poor physical condition, gotten tired,missed some of his shots,gotten angry at  himself, served badly , lost the game) ...he wouldn't have (gotten tired。。。 ) ...:

Boris was in poor physical condition.  He got tired.  If Boris hadn't been in poor  physical condition, he wouldn't have gotten tired.
  He missed some of his shots. He  got angry at himself.  If he hadn't missed some of his  shots, he wouldn't have gotten  angry at himself.
  He got angry at himself. He served badly.    If he hadn't gotten angry at  himself, he wouldn't have served  badly.
  He served badly. He lost the  game. If he hadn't served badly, he  wouldn't have lost the game.
  He lost the game. He decided to get into better shape. If he hadn't lost the game, the  wouldn't have decided to get  into better shape.

四、场景学习  if  he wish 信息问题答案记忆:

1、引导语:

    Now take your pencil and a piece  of paper. You're going to hear  Chris talking about some of the things that she regrets in her life. Don't write anything yet, just  listen.

2、情景:

    I still have so many things to  learn.  I want to be a good  reporter, like Jake.  I'd like to  be able to interview people  in an interesting way. I'm sorry I didn't learn more  about journalism before I started working at WEFL. I  also want to be able to edit  quickly, like Roger Ward.  And most of all,  I'm sorry I twisted my ankle. Now I  have to work at a desk all day. I hate that.

3、引导语:

Now take your pencil and a piece  of paper. You're going to hear Chris repeat what she just said.  This time it will be a dictation,  so write down everything you  hear her say. There will be a  pause after each group of words  for you to write. OK? Let's  begin.

4、连环多重压码多个句子慢放情景:

      I still have so many things to  learn.

        I want to be a good reporter,

        like Jake.

        I'd like to be able

      to interview people

        in an interesting way.

        I'm sorry I didn't learn 

        more about  journalism

        before I started working at  WEFL .

        I also want to be able 

        to edit quickly, like Roger  Ward.

        And most of all,

        I'm sorry I twisted my ankle.

        Now I have to work at a desk  all day.

        I hate that.

5、引导语改错:

      Now listen as Chris's talk is  repeated for the last time. This  time,    check your paper to see if you can find any mistakes and  correct them. Ready? Listen.

6、连续播放情景:

        I still have so many things to  learn. I want to be a good  reporter,  like Jake. I'd like to  be able to interview people in an  interesting way. I'm sorry I didn't  learn more about journalism before  I started working at WEFL。  I also want to be able to edit  quickly,  like Roger Ward.  And most of all, I'm sorry I  twisted my ankle. Now I  have to work at a desk all day. I hate that.

7、引导学习回答wish问题:
  use the verb wish in your answers these questions:

      Now use your paper to answer  these questions. Make sure that  you use the verb wish in your answers. For example, you  hear.. .


  What does Chris wish she were?  And you say. . .  She wishes she were a good  reporter, like Jake.  Or you hear. . .  What does she wish she could  do?      And you say . . .  She wishes she could interview  people in an interesting way.  All right. Let's begin.

8、问题回答:

  Question  One.  What does Chris wish she were?    She wishes she were a good  reporter, like Jake.
      Question Two.  What does she wish she could  do?    She wishes she could interview  people in an interesting way.
        Question Three.  What does she wish she had  done before she started working  at WEFL?  She wishes she had learned more about journalism.
    Question Four.  What does she wish she could do  quickly?  She wishes she could edit  quickly, like Roger Ward.
  Question Five. What does she wish she hadn't  done? She wishes she hadn't twisted  her ankle.

  And I wish we didn't have to go  on to the next lesson. But we do.  And that's the end of Lesson Six.


sunyuting1 2007-11-11 22:36
第六课总结:

1、这一课应用wish的if 从句表达复杂事物,练习实际情况相反的否定句式,并且压码听懂信息的问题,是前几课的综合练习。
2、基本句式是:
if  he hadn't been ...he wouldn't  have  ,
  What does she wish she ...so.(in such)...  She wishes she were ...so...
3、学习的压码内容:可以练习深度压码听清,可以练习压码一个句子,然后对每个句子多重压码,再压码多个句子,再前后句子连环压码,直到压码一个小的段落,是最好的练习范例。 比如:连环多重压码多个句子慢放情景:

      I still have so many things to  learn.

        I want to be a good reporter,

        like Jake.

        I'd like to be able

      to interview people

        in an interesting way.

        I'm sorry I didn't learn 

        more about  journalism

        before I started working at  WEFL .

        I also want to be able 

        to edit quickly, like Roger  Ward.

        And most of all,

        I'm sorry I twisted my ankle.

        Now I have to work at a desk  all day.

        I hate that.

4、第一个场景练习的难度较大的地方:将if否定句式连接上课学习的wish否定句子,布局合理,场景信息需要压码理解记忆,是记忆整个信息以后的句子变换,从If he hadn't been in such poor condition,  he wouldn't have  gotten so tired.进行压码练习学会If he hadn't been 。。。he wouldn't have  句式,然后用非真实情景否定句合成因果关系if条件从句,而连环因果关系练习前面的结果为后面句子的条件形成句子群互为条件和结果的连环练习,对于写作系列片断练习很重要。

5、第二个场景练习的难度也很大,场景学习 if  he wish 信息问题答案记忆,记忆情景难度大,所以专门练习深度听清来解决压码听懂理解后记忆的信息,连环多重压码多个句子慢放情景,采用了慢放以后的快放改错练习巩固压码记忆信息,What does Chris wish she were?    She wishes she were a good  reporter, like Jake.采用What does Chris wish she 。。。She wishes she were 的句式练习wish句式和信息记忆问题答案中和练习,直到What does she wish she ....(were,could do, had done, sould do quikly,hadn't done  )练习提问并回答听懂记忆的全部信息。

6、对于大信息量的理解记忆一个是要听懂,一个是要会造句,一个能够记忆片断压码,这课内容可以采用整理、压码听懂理解记忆练习,听懂练习必须将耳朵摸透,以后应用才会自如,如感觉记忆多个片断困难,可以采用压码跟读来帮助记忆。
7、可以进行心念压码抄写和心念压码注音综合练习,对于听懂记忆语音和文本精确性作用很大。

本文是大家练习压码听懂的经典综合练习之一。


sunyuting1 2007-11-11 23:50
第十一册 第七课

一、基本词组say的过去式用法:
said,say,about to ,talk to ,tell him ,said that ,told  the audience that ,

1、said:
hear. . .  It's  ..say. . .  He said,hear. . .  say. . . She said ...,They said ...:


Welcome ... Jake is .. report on teachers.  You  will hear ... mentioned. How do you spell .... Listen carefully to  the report.

  .. I'm ...this is .., a  report on teachers . . .    ...are  about to become ... But there are not .... Experts are trying to ...like these to .. . .  Professor ....said it was ...to be a teacher.  It is ... to be a teacher and to see people....


    OK. How do you spell ....mentioned ...  P-r-i-n-c-e-t-o-n.
              an enormous privilege
                it was...
                it was ...to  be a teacher
                He said it was ...to be a teacher.
             
  hear. . .  It's ...to be a  teacher. ..say. . .  He said...to be ....  . hear. . We'll need .... say. . . She said we would need ...

  It's..to be a teacher.  She said it was ..to be ...
  We'll need ....  She said we would need ....
  ...are looking  for ...right now.  She said ...were  looking for ...
  ...can make .... He said ...could make  .... 
  ...depend on ....  He said ...depended ....
...isn't easy, but it can be  .... He said .. wasn't easy, but it could be ...
  This exercise is ....  They said ...was  almost over.

2、about to,talk to  ,Tell him :
hear....  .say. . "about to ":

  In fact, .... exercise is about to...  First, let's listen to .... ...is about to go ....  Why does Rita want to ....Listen carefully for...answer.

  ... Detective..is ... I'd like you  to talk to... Tell him what you know. .... I'm about to watch... I want to ... I did something ...wants me to . . . Can it wait... ..is in...; he's about to .... It'll only  take ..  but I  really can't tell him ... he probably doesn't ....

  OK. Why does Rita want to  .....She wants to check the makeup.

    go on the air
  about to ...
  "..." is about to ....
      "Murder at Midnight"
  I'm about to watch ".... "

    Something that is about to ...is ready ...short time.Let's ...expression.  You hear. . . "Murder at Midnight" is ....  ..say. . . ".." is about to  .... You hear. . . ..is in..; he's going ...  .say. . . is .;  he's about to ...  we're about to ... ...
    "." is going  on ....      "..." is about to  go....
    ..is in a hurry;  he's going ..,,.  .is in a hurry;  he's about to leave.
  Is he ready to ...? Is he about to ...?
    ...will be....  ...are about to retire.
  ...are ready to  ....    ..are about to  ....
  Are we ready to ...? Are we about to ...?
    I was just going to ask....  I was just about to ask ....


3、 said that ,told  the audience that ,that ,
。。。that 。。。He told ...that ......was that  ...(Who said that 。。。):

  let's listen to .... Who said that ...  Listen for the answer.

  ...told  the audience that .....  ...was that  ... ...will  be .... There are not  ... According to ..., we will need 1....

  OK. Who said ...?  Mary Futrell.
    make a difference
  young people could ...
  Alan Guskin told ..
...told ...that ....

    hear. . . "...an make ...," ...said to  .....say. . . He told ...that ....  hear. . ."...will be...," Mary said to...
.say. . . She told ...that

    "Young people ...," ...said to ....  He told...that ....
    "Every ...will be ...," Mary said to ....  She told ...that ...
    "Not everyone ...," he said to me.  He told me that ....
    "You are...,"..said to...  He told us that ....
  "I am..about to...,"  he said to....  He told the class that he was ....
    "You are...who will ...," he said  to ....  He told the new teachers that ..who would  ...
    "If you.., you can ..,"  he said to us.  He told us that if we

二、基本句子:

  1、 said
    it was an enormous privilege to  be a teacher
    He said it was an enormous  privilege to be a teacher.

  It's an enormous privilege to be a teacher.  She said it was an enormous privilege to be a teacher.
  We'll need many new teachers.  She said we would need many  new teachers.
  Many communities are looking  for teachers right now.  She said many communities were  looking for teachers right now.
  Young people can make a difference in creating a better world. He said young people could make  a difference in creating a bette world. 
  Good schools depend on good  teachers.  He said good schools depended on good teachers.
  Teaching isn't easy, but it can be  the most rewarding job in the world. He said teaching wasn't easy, but it could be the most rewarding job in the world.
  This exercise is almost over.  They said this exercise was  almost over.

2、about to :

  "Murder at Midnight" is about to go on the air. .
  I'm about to watch "Murder at Midnight. "


"Murder at Midnight" is going  on the air in two minutes.      "Murder at Midnight" is about to  go on the air.
    Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's going to leave.  Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's about to leave.
  Is he ready to solve the mystery  at WEFL? Is he about to solve the mystery at  WEFL?
    Many teachers will be retiring  soon.  Many teachers are about to retire.
  These young people are ready to  become new teachers.    These young people are about to  become new teachers.
  Are we ready to end this  exercise? Are we about to end this  exercise?
    I was just going to ask the same  question.  I was just about to ask the same  question.

3、that :

  young people could make a difference
  Alan Guskin told the audience
  Alan Guskin told the audience  that young people could make a difference.
 

  "Young people can make a difference," Alan Guskin said to the audience.  He told the audience  that young people could make a difference.
    "Every community in the country will be looking for new teachers," Mary said to the reporter.  She told the reporter that every community in the country would be looking for new teachers.
    "Not everyone can be a teacher," he said to me.  He told me that not everyone could be a teacher.
    "You are the hope for the future," the President said to us.  He told us that we were the hope for the future.
  "I am old and about to retire,"  he said to the class.  He told the class that he was old  and about to retire.
    "You are the ones who will have  to face these problems," he said  to the new teachers.  He told the new teachers that  they were the ones who would  have to face these problems.
    "If you try hard, you can do it,"  he said to us.  He told us that if we tried hard,  we could do it.

4、复合句型变化单词对比:

(1) said:
It's an enormous privilege to be a teacher.  She said it was an enormous privilege to be a teacher.
  We'll need many new teachers.  She said we would need many  new teachers.
  Many communities are looking  for teachers right now.  She said many communities were  looking for teachers right now.
  Young people can make a difference in creating a better world. He said young people could make  a difference in creating a bette world. 
  Good schools depend on good  teachers.  He said good schools depended on good teachers.
  Teaching isn't easy, but it can be  the most rewarding job in the world. He said teaching wasn't easy, but it could be the most rewarding job in the world.
  This exercise is almost over.  They said this exercise was  almost over.

  It's ---  He said it was ,
  We'll---She said we would
...are ---She said ...were 
...can --- He said ...could
...depend on ---He said ...depended on
... isn't .., but... can be  ---He said ... wasn't ..., but .. could be
  This exercise is ---They said this exercise was... 

(2 ) going to --- about to  :

"Murder at Midnight" is going  on the air in two minutes.      "Murder at Midnight" is about to  go on the air.
    Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's going to leave.  Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's about to leave.
  Is he ready to solve the mystery  at WEFL? Is he about to solve the mystery at  WEFL?
    Many teachers will be retiring  soon.  Many teachers are about to retire.
  These young people are ready to  become new teachers.    These young people are about to  become new teachers.
  Are we ready to end this  exercise? Are we about to end this  exercise?
    I was just going to ask the same  question.  I was just about to ask the same  question.

"..." is going  ...in two minutes.  ---  "..." is about to  go ....
...is ...;  he's going .... ---  ...is ...;  he's about to ....
Is he ready to ...? Is he about to...?
...will be retiring  soon. ...----are about to retire.
...are ready to  ....    ---.....are about to  ....
Are we ready to ...? Are we about to ...?
  ...going to ....  ---...about to ...

(3) said to --- told :

"Young people can make a difference," Alan Guskin said to the audience.  He told the audience  that young people could make a difference.
    "Every community in the country will be looking for new teachers," Mary said to the reporter.  She told the reporter that every community in the country would be looking for new teachers.
    "Not everyone can be a teacher," he said to me.  He told me that not everyone could be a teacher.
    "You are the hope for the future," the President said to us.  He told us that we were the hope for the future.
  "I am old and about to retire,"  he said to the class.  He told the class that he was old  and about to retire.
    "You are the ones who will have  to face these problems," he said  to the new teachers.  He told the new teachers that  they were the ones who would  have to face these problems.
    "If you try hard, you can do it,"  he said to us.  He told us that if we tried hard,  we could do it.


"...can ...," ....said to ...  --- -- He told ....that...could ....
    "....will be ...," Mary said to ....----  She told the reporter that ....would be....
    "....can be...," he said to me.  ----  He told me that ...could be....
    "You are ...," the President said to us.  He told us that we were the hope for the future.
  "I am ...,"  he said to....  He told ...that he was....
    "You are ...will ...," he said  to.... ----  He told ...that  they were ....
    "If you try hard, you can ...,"  he said to us.  He told us that if we tried ...  we could ....

三、场景学习report on teachers:

1、引导语:

      Welcome to Lesson Seven. Jake is giving a report on teachers.  You  will hear the name of a famous American university mentioned. How do you spell the name of this university? Listen carefully to  the report.

2、情景a  report on teachers :

    Good evening. I'm Jake  Seltzer and this is "Hello  America." Tonight, a  report on teachers . . .    These young people are  about to become teachers. But there are not enough of them.  Experts are trying to  convince young people  like these to choose  teaching as a career. . .  Professor Marvin Bressler  of Princeton University  said it was an enormous  privilege to be a teacher.  It is an enormous privilege to be a teacher and to see people come  alive from time to time.

3、学习:

    OK. How do you spell the name  of the university mentioned in this report  M:  P-r-i-n-c-e-t-o-n.

              Now listen and repeat.

              an enormous privilege
                it was an enormous privilege
                it was an enormous privilege to  be a teacher
                He said it was an enormous  privilege to be a teacher.
                He said it was an enormous  privilege to be a teacher.

4、引导学习  It's ---  He said it was ,We'll---She said we would :

        Now you hear. . .  It's an enormous privilege to be a  teacher.  And you say. . .  He said it was an enormous  privilege to be a teacher.  You hear. . We'll need many new teachers.  And you say. . .  She said we would need many  new teachers.  All right? Let's begin.

5、练习:

  It's an enormous privilege to be a teacher.  She said it was an enormous privilege to be a teacher.
  We'll need many new teachers.  She said we would need many  new teachers.
  Many communities are looking  for teachers right now.  She said many communities were  looking for teachers right now.
  Young people can make a difference in creating a better world. He said young people could make  a difference in creating a bette world. 
  Good schools depend on good  teachers.  He said good schools depended on good teachers.
  Teaching isn't easy, but it can be  the most rewarding job in the world. He said teaching wasn't easy, but it could be the most rewarding job in the world.
  This exercise is almost over.  They said this exercise was  almost over.

四、场景学习
Rita want to watch  "Murder at Midnight" is about to go on the air
about to :

1、引导语:

  In fact, it is over. The next exercise is about to begin.  First, let's listen to Steven and Rita.  "Murder at Midnight" is about to go on the air.  Why does Rita want to watch "Murder at Midnight"? Listen carefully for the answer.

  2、情景:
 
  Excuse me, Rita. Detective Modine is here. I'd like you to talk to him. Tell him what you know.  Sorry, Steven. I'm about to watch "Murder at  Midnight." I want to check  the makeup. I did something a little different. Terry wants me to . . . Can it wait? Detective  Modine is in a hurry; he's about to leave. It'll only  take a minute.  Oh, all right. .  but I  really can't tell him anything he probably doesn't already know.

3、学习:

  OK. Why does Rita want to  watch "Murder at Midnight"?  She wants to check the makeup.

  Now listen and repeat.

  go on the air
  about to go on the air
  "Murder at Midnight" is about to go on the air.
  "Murder at Midnight" is about to go on the air. .

    "Murder at Midnight"
  I'm about to watch "Murder at Midnight. "
  I'm about to watch "Murder at Midnight. "

4、引导学习:Something that is about to  happen is ready and going to happen in a very short time

    Something that is about to  happen is ready and going to happen in a very short time.Let's practice this expression.  You hear. . . "Murder at Midnight" is going  on the air in two minutes.  And you say. . . "Murder at Midnight" is about to  go on the air. You hear. . . Detective Modine is in a hurry; he's going to leave。  And you say. . . Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's about to leave. And we're about to begin. Are  you ready? Here we go.

5、练习:

    "Murder at Midnight" is going  on the air in two minutes.      "Murder at Midnight" is about to  go on the air.
    Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's going to leave.  Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's about to leave.
  Is he ready to solve the mystery  at WEFL? Is he about to solve the mystery at  WEFL?
    Many teachers will be retiring  soon.  Many teachers are about to retire.
  These young people are ready to  become new teachers.    These young people are about to  become new teachers.
  Are we ready to end this  exercise? Are we about to end this  exercise?
    I was just going to ask the same  question.  I was just about to ask the same  question.

五、场景学习more of Jake's report on teachers:
told  the audience that ,that ,

1、引导语:

  Now let's listen to some more of Jake's report on teachers. Who said that we would need 1.4 million new teachers by the end of the decade?  Listen carefully for the answer.

2、情景:

  Alan Guskin told  the audience that young people could make a difference.  The message he left behind was that  young people could make a difference  in helping to create a better  and more peaceful world.  Many teachers will  be retiring soon. There are not  enough young teachers to replace them.  According to Mary Futrell, we will need 1.4 million new teachers.

3、学习:

    OK. Who said we would need 1.4 million new teachers by the  end ofthe decade?  Mary Futrell.

  Now listen and repeat.

  make a difference
  young people could make a difference
  Alan Guskin told the audience
  Alan Guskin told the audience  that young people could make a difference.
  Alan Guskin told the audience  that young people could make a  difference.

4、引导学习:

    Now you hear. . . "Young people can make a difference," Alan Guskin said to  the audience.And you say. . . He told the audience that young  people could make a difference. You hear. . ."Every community in the country will be looking for new teachers," Mary said to the  reporter.And you say. . . She told the reporter that every community in the country would be looking for new teachers.. OK? Let's begin.

5、练习:

    "Young people can make a difference," Alan Guskin said to the audience.  He told the audience  that young people could make a difference.
    "Every community in the country will be looking for new teachers," Mary said to the reporter.  She told the reporter that every community in the country would be looking for new teachers.
    "Not everyone can be a teacher," he said to me.  He told me that not everyone could be a teacher.
    "You are the hope for the future," the President said to us.  He told us that we were the hope for the future.
  "I am old and about to retire,"  he said to the class.  He told the class that he was old  and about to retire.
    "You are the ones who will have  to face these problems," he said  to the new teachers.  He told the new teachers that  they were the ones who would  have to face these problems.
    "If you try hard, you can do it,"  he said to us.  He told us that if we tried hard,  we could do it.

  And that's the end of Lesson Seven.


sunyuting1 2007-11-12 14:46
复杂合成句子的学习差异对比是简单有效的做法

对于如何使用say的不同用法,过去总是感觉用法太多,总想总结一次,这次终于如愿,如and you say是用say, He said (后面一句说过的话)。。。用said,短时间将要发生的事情Something that is about to  happen is ready and going to happen in a very short time用about to ,如he's going to leave.  he's about to leave.是going to 的意思,将来式,没有见到talk about 这个也经常见到,Alan Guskin told the audience  that 。。。(后面告诉一句话),  Mary said to the reporter.  She told the reporter that 。。。  he said to me.  He told me that 。。。  the President said to us.  He told us that。。。.he said to the class.  He told the class that 。。。  he said  to the new teachers.  He told the new teachers that  。。。  。。he said to us.  He told us that 。。。明白了he said to 必须加to,而He told 后面没有to。所以说总共有三种情况:
1、say
2、he said
3、 about to 
。。。 is about to  about to 前面加is,are,was,he's about to, Is he about to 。。。?.  。。。are about to 。。。. Are we about to ? I was just about to ask。。。question
4、He told us that 。。。
He told the audience  ,
She told the reporter ,
He told me ,
He told us ,
He told the class 。等等。
5、tell him
如:Tell him what you know。
归纳:
said,say,about to ,talk to ,tell him ,said that ,told  the audience that 。
这样he said,you say,tell him,told me,talk to,talking about,about to的用法就搞清楚了。
所以对于一些句子的变化,由一个简单句子,另外一个简单句子,组成一个复杂合成句子,如果学语法太抽象,在实际句子中自然学会太零碎,不够系统,最好的办法就是直接将简单句子和复杂合成句子进行直接单词差异进行对比,前面一课就运用了对比句子的单词差异,一目了然,自认就学会了。只要归纳出来即可将一篇文章进行简化理解记忆和应用。

本课的归纳复合句型变化单词对比:

(1) said:
It's an enormous privilege to be a teacher.  She said it was an enormous privilege to be a teacher.
  We'll need many new teachers.  She said we would need many  new teachers.
  Many communities are looking  for teachers right now.  She said many communities were  looking for teachers right now.
  Young people can make a difference in creating a better world. He said young people could make  a difference in creating a bette world. 
  Good schools depend on good  teachers.  He said good schools depended on good teachers.
  Teaching isn't easy, but it can be  the most rewarding job in the world. He said teaching wasn't easy, but it could be the most rewarding job in the world.
  This exercise is almost over.  They said this exercise was  almost over.

  It's ---  He said it was ,
  We'll---She said we would
...are ---She said ...were 
...can --- He said ...could
...depend on ---He said ...depended on
... isn't .., but... can be  ---He said ... wasn't ..., but .. could be
  This exercise is ---They said this exercise was... 

(2 ) going to --- about to  :

"Murder at Midnight" is going  on the air in two minutes.      "Murder at Midnight" is about to  go on the air.
    Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's going to leave.  Detective Modine is in a hurry;  he's about to leave.
  Is he ready to solve the mystery  at WEFL? Is he about to solve the mystery at  WEFL?
    Many teachers will be retiring  soon.  Many teachers are about to retire.
  These young people are ready to  become new teachers.    These young people are about to  become new teachers.
  Are we ready to end this  exercise? Are we about to end this  exercise?
    I was just going to ask the same  question.  I was just about to ask the same  question.

"..." is going  ...in two minutes.  ---  "..." is about to  go ....
...is ...;  he's going .... ---  ...is ...;  he's about to ....
Is he ready to ...? Is he about to...?
...will be retiring  soon. ...----are about to retire.
...are ready to  ....    ---.....are about to  ....
Are we ready to ...? Are we about to ...?
  ...going to ....  ---...about to ...

(3) said to --- told :

"Young people can make a difference," Alan Guskin said to the audience.  He told the audience  that young people could make a difference.
    "Every community in the country will be looking for new teachers," Mary said to the reporter.  She told the reporter that every community in the country would be looking for new teachers.
    "Not everyone can be a teacher," he said to me.  He told me that not everyone could be a teacher.
    "You are the hope for the future," the President said to us.  He told us that we were the hope for the future.
  "I am old and about to retire,"  he said to the class.  He told the class that he was old  and about to retire.
    "You are the ones who will have  to face these problems," he said  to the new teachers.  He told the new teachers that  they were the ones who would  have to face these problems.
    "If you try hard, you can do it,"  he said to us.  He told us that if we tried hard,  we could do it.


"...can ...," ....said to ...  --- -- He told ....that...could ....
    "....will be ...," Mary said to ....----  She told the reporter that ....would be....
    "....can be...," he said to me.  ----  He told me that ...could be....
    "You are ...," the President said to us.  He told us that we were the hope for the future.
  "I am ...,"  he said to....  He told ...that he was....
    "You are ...will ...," he said  to.... ----  He told ...that  they were ....
    "If you try hard, you can ...,"  he said to us.  He told us that if we tried ...  we could ....
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 102 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-11-12 15:09
第十一册第八课

一、基本词组think的用法:

Do you think ....? Yes, I do. 
Do you know who ...?No, not yet.
Have you interviewed  ... Yes, I have.
This isn't  ...  Why?  I'll ask ..., if you don't mind. 
OK. Shoot. 
Do you think...? Do you know  ..?  Yes, I do, and no, I don't.

1、Yes, I do, and no, I don't.

Welcome to... ,...trying to find out what ... knows about  problems .... Why isn't ..? Listen .answer.
Do you think ....? Yes, I do.  Do you know who ...?No, not yet. Have you interviewed  ... Yes, I have. This isn't  ...  Why?  I'll ask ..., if you don't mind.  OK. Shoot.  Do you think...? Do you know  ..?  Yes, I do, and no, I don't.

Why does...think ... isn't working out? 
Because Jake is asking all the  questions

yes, I do
  no, I don't
  Yes, I do, and no, I don't.
 
hear. . .  Do you think ....? Do you know who ..? 
say . . .  Yes, I do, and no, I don't. 
You hear. . .Have you interviewed ...? Did they  give ...? 
say. . .  Yes, I have, and no, they didn't. 
Notice that the first .."yes," .second  ."no."

Do you think...? Do you know who ...?    Yes, I do, and no, I don't.
  Have you interviewed...? Did they  give ...?  Yes, I have, and no, they didn't.
  Will you be talking to ...? Would you like to see ...?  Yes, I will, and no, I wouldn't.
    Did you know ...? Can he  build ...?  Yes, I did, and no, he can't.
  Well, that's.... Could I get ... to drink? Would you like .. to eat?  Yes, you could, and no, I  wouldn't.
  Had you heard ...before ..investigation? Will you be asking ... about ..? Yes, I had, and no, I won't.
  Is this ...? Are there  ...? Yes, it is, and no, there aren't.

2、He asked me if I:

After.interview..., .. meets .... She has ...questions.
Does she ask him if ... ...?
Well, how did .....? 
He seems like.... He only asked me...
I don't think 
he knows ...
We  probably know ....
  What kind ...? 
He asked me if I thought ...
And what did you say?
  I told... It's obvious,
  isn't it? He thinks so.... 
Does he ...? 
I don't know.
He asked me if .... 
And what did you say?
I told him that ...was.., ....
You  didn't say that.

.Did Chris ask Jake if ..was ..?
No, she didn't.

sabotaging the station
  someone was ... deliberately
  if I thought .. was
  sabotaging the station  deliberately
  He asked me if I thought...
 
hear. . .  "Do you think....?"
he asked me. 
say. . .  He asked me if I thought  .... 
hear. . .  "Do you have any idea who...?"
he asked me. 
say. . .  He asked me
if I had any idea
  who it was. 


  "Do you think ...?"
he asked me. 
He asked me if I thought  ...
  "Do you have ....?" .... 
He asked me if ...
I had any idea who it was.
  "Can you give me..?"
he asked us. 
He asked us if
we could .. him....
  "Is Rita still ...?"
he asked her.
He asked her if ... was
still  upset about retiring.
  "Are you going to..?"
I asked her.
I asked her if she was
going to run away with Terry.
  "Will ...what's  going on?"
he asked them.
He asked them if .. would
help find out what was going on.
  " Can we ..?"
they asked me.
They asked me if they could ...


3、 According to..., :

One more exercise,
  and then you can stop.
  Chris is talking to..
  Has Mike had his ... yet?

Has ...interview you ..?
  Do  you know...about him?
According to..., he's ... He's very clever.
Jake said he was...
I wonder what ...
  I haven't ...
Rita thinks ....
  Don't pay .. attention to..
Accoeding to ..., he's .... According to ... even I'm ....

  I say, " Steven says that ...."
    say... According to Steven ,
    he's the best ....
    I say, " Rita thinks ...."
    say... According to...
    , even I'm handsome.

  Steven  says that ..... According to ... , he's the best ....
    Rita thinks ....  According to .....
  Jake says that....  According to Jake ....
  Both of them think there's .....  According to both of them,  there's...
  We say ....  According to us, the glovr...
  I think this ....  According to me ,
    this lesson is over.


二、基本句子:

Yes, I do, and no, I don't.
Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately? Do you know who it
  is?    Yes, I do, and no, I don't.

"Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately?" he asked me.  He asked me if I thought  someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.

" Steven says that he's  the best detective in Stamfoed." say... According to Steven , he's the best detective  in Stamford.

1、Yes, I do, and no, I don't:

Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately? Do you know who it
  is?    Yes, I do, and no, I don't.
  Have you interviewed other  people at the station? Did they  give you any information?  Yes, I have, and no, they didn't.
  Will you be talking to Thomas  Ames? Would you like to see my  interview with him?  Yes, I will, and no, I wouldn't.
    Did you know he owns land next  to the Nature Center? Can he  build apartments there?  Yes, I did, and no, he can't.
  Well, that's good to hear. Could I get you something to drink? Would you like something to eat?  Yes, you could, and no, I  wouldn't.
  Had you heard of Thomas Ames before you started this  investigation? Will you be asking him about Mirage Realty? Yes, I had, and no, I won't.
  Is this interview over? Are there  any more questions? Yes, it is, and no, there aren't.

2、He asked me if I:
He asked me if I thought someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.


  "Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately?" he asked me.  He asked me if I thought  someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.
  "Do you have any idea who it  is?" he asked me.  He asked me if I had any idea who it was.
  "Can you give me some names?" he asked us.  He asked us if we could give him  some names.
  "Is Rita still upset about  retiring?" he asked her.  He asked her if Rita was still  upset about retiring.
  "Are you going to run away with Terry?" I asked her.  I asked her if she was going to run away with Terry.
  "Will Roger help find out what's  going on?" he asked them. He asked them if Roger would help find out what was going on.
  " Can we stop now?" they asked me. They asked me if they could stop now.

3、According to Steven , he's ...:

" Steven says that he's  the best detective in Stamfoed." say... According to Steven , he's the best detective  in Stamford.

    Steven  says that he's the best detective in Stamford. According to Steven , he's the best detective in Stamford.
  Rita thinks even I'm handsome.  According to Rita ,even I'm handsome.
  Jake says that Detective Modine is a nice guy.  According to Jake , Detective Modine is a nice guy.
  Both of them think there's a  connection with Thomas Ames.  According to both of them, there's a
connection with Thonas Ames.
  We say the glove is the key to  solving the mystery.  According to us, the glovr is the key to silving the mestery.
  I think this lesson is over.  According to me , this lesson is over.


     
三、场景学习同时回答两个问题:

1、引导语 what Jake knows about the problems , answer:

  Welcome to Lesson Eight. Detective Modine is trying to find out what Jake knows about the problems at  WEFL. Why isn't the interview working out? Listen carefully for  the answer.

2、情景:

  Do you think someone is  sabotaging the station  deliberately? Yes, I do.  Do you know who it is?No, not yet. Have you interviewed  other people at the station? Yes, I have. This isn't  working out, Jake.  Why?  I'll ask the questions, if you don't mind.  OK. Shoot.  Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately? Do you know  who it is?  Yes, I do, and no, I don't.

3、学习:

  OK. Why does Detective  Modine think the interview with  Jake isn't working out?  Because Jake is asking all the  questions.

  Now listen and repeat.

  yes, I do
  no, I don't
  Yes, I do, and no, I don't.
  Yes, I do, and no, I don't.

4、引导学习first short answer  is always "yes," and the second  short answer is always "no." :

    Now you hear. . .  Do you think someone is  sabotaging the station  deliberately? Do you know who it  is?  And you say . . .  Yes, I do, and no, I don't.  You hear. . .  Have you interviewed other people at the station? Did they  give you any information?  And you say. . .  Yes, I have, and no, they didn't.  Notice that the first short answer  is always "yes," and the second  short answer is always "no." All right. Let's go.

5、练习---对两个提问和同时回答:

  Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately? Do you know who it
  is?    Yes, I do, and no, I don't.
  Have you interviewed other  people at the station? Did they  give you any information?  Yes, I have, and no, they didn't.
  Will you be talking to Thomas  Ames? Would you like to see my  interview with him?  Yes, I will, and no, I wouldn't.
    Did you know he owns land next  to the Nature Center? Can he  build apartments there?  Yes, I did, and no, he can't.
  Well, that's good to hear. Could I get you something to drink? Would you like something to eat?  Yes, you could, and no, I  wouldn't.
  Had you heard of Thomas Ames before you started this  investigation? Will you be asking him about Mirage Realty? Yes, I had, and no, I won't.
  Is this interview over? Are there  any more questions? Yes, it is, and no, there aren't.

四、场景学习---饭馆谈话征求意见:

1、引导语ask and answer with adea:

  After the interview with  Detective Modine, Jake meets Chris in the cafeteria. She has a  lot of questions. Does she ask him if Detective Modine is a  nice guy? Listen carefully for the  answer.

2、情景--询问看法:

  Well, how did it go with  Detective Modine?    It went OK. He seems like a    nice guy. He only asked me a  few questions. I don't think  he knows much yet. We  probably know as much as he  does.  What kind of questions did he ask?    He asked me if I thought  someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.  And what did you say?    I told him yes. It's obvious,  isn't it? He thinks so too.  Does he have any idea who it  is?    I don't know. He asked me if  I had any idea who it was.  And what did you say?  I told him that it was  probably a woman, a woman  with a twisted ankle.  Oh, come on, Jake. You  didn't say that.

3、学习循序渐进压码记忆长句子:

  OK. Did Chris ask Jake if Detective Modine was a nice guy?  No, she didn't.

  Now listen and repeat.

  sabotaging the station
  someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately
  if I thought someone was sabotaging the station deliberately
  He asked me if I thought someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.
  He asked me if I thought someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.

4、引导学习--直接引语与间接引语举例:

  Now you hear. . .  "Do you think someone is  sabotaging the station deliberately?" he asked me.  And you say. . .  He asked me if I thought  someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.  You hear. . .  "Do you have any idea who it  is?" he asked me.  And you say. . .  He asked me if I had any idea  who it was.  OK? Here we go.

5、练习从said 继续向asked延续变换形式:

  "Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately?" he asked me.  He asked me if I thought  someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.
  "Do you have any idea who it  is?" he asked me.  He asked me if I had any idea who it was.
  "Can you give me some names?" he asked us.  He asked us if we could give him  some names.
  "Is Rita still upset about  retiring?" he asked her.  He asked her if Rita was still  upset about retiring.
  "Are you going to run away with Terry?" I asked her.  I asked her if she was going to run away with Terry.
  "Will Roger help find out what's  going on?" he asked them. He asked them if Roger would help find out what was going on.
  " Can we stop now?" they asked me. They asked me if they could stop now.

五、场景学习---猜测别人谈话的意思According to 。。。:

1、引导语:

  One more exercise, and then you can stop. Chris is talking to Mike. Has Mike had his interwiew with Detective Mofine yet? Listen carfully for the answer.

2、情景:

Has Detective Modine  interview you yet ,Mike? Do  you know anything about him? According to Steven, he's the best detective in Stamford. He's very clever. Jake said he was a nice guy.I wonder what he's like. I haven't met him yet.Rita thinks he's really handsome.Don't pay any attention to Rita, Accoeding to Steven, he's the best detective in Stamford. According to Rita, even I'm handsome. According to Rita, even I'm handsome.

3、引导学习According to :

  Now I say, " Steven says that he's  the best detective in Stamfoed." And you say... According to Steven , he's the best detective  in Stamford.  I say, " Rita thinks even I'm handsome." And you say... According to Rita, even I'm handsome. All right. Let's begin.

4、练习----从间接引语say、think到领悟意思的 According to 句子变换:

Steven  says that he's the best detective in Stamford. According to Steven , he's the best detective in Stamford.
  Rita thinks even I'm handsome.  According to Rita ,even I'm handsome.
  Jake says that Detective Modine is a nice guy.  According to Jake , Detective Modine is a nice guy.
  Both of them think there's a  connection with Thomas Ames.  According to both of them, there's a
connection with Thonas Ames.
  We say the glove is the key to  solving the mystery.  According to us, the glovr is the key to silving the mestery.
  I think this lesson is over.  According to me , this lesson is over.

Yes, it is , This is the end of Lesson Eight.


sunyuting1 2007-11-12 15:21
第十一册 第八课总结:

这一课只要掌握两个关键点,就能较好完成:一是呼吸,二是单词差异的确定。
1、调整呼吸和深度听清练习,我们学会了两个基本技能,一是深吸一口气进行缓慢均匀地呼气中数可以听到多少个句子,一般情况下经过练习达到一口气40个左右句子没有问题,这就为连续一口气较长时间心中压码回想打下了良好的基础,要想很好地理解并记忆长句i,特别是将几个句子连接起来回想,比如句子变换,有两个句子变成一个复杂句子,甚至一直连到下面的另外的变换的复杂句子组合,用呼吸的办法就很容易做到,不然你如果考虑句子中的单词变换和选择就无法听清回想完整句子细节,考虑回想句子细节就无法选择正确的连接词和变异单词。所以压码做到连续压码长句子达到连续压码若干个句子串,腾出时间反复回想品味句子的语音、确切清晰而不是模糊印象不深的细节,就必须采用深度听清中压码一个句子的办法,深吸一口气用呼气的办法用力呼气回想,虽然不出声但是和跟读说话一样用力想,一直慢慢缓慢地呼气到若干个句子,有了一口气40个句子的基本能力,呼一口气连续回想出个10句、8句也会显得很容易。
  你这样练习压码听懂的回想,就有非常充裕的时间,不慌不忙地缓慢地跟着语音进行回想任意特别长的句子串,压码多个句子,压码长句子,压码到练习中的几对句子,做到压码中完全理解消化吸收留下深刻印象的目的。
2、学习互动磁带以后必须将一些类似的单词精确选择出来定位,因为我们在整理的时候已经进行了认真地总结归纳,但是如果你抓不到问题的关键,在进行压码听懂练习的时候还是会不知所措,就不会产生在任意一遍连续听每个句子的一篇文章,做到任意值个句子全部准确理解记忆的目的。下面我来举例说明:

1、Yes, I do, and no, I don't:

对于提问两个问题征求你的意见的答案这样的练习,一次要压码至少3个句子,答案的类型就是Yes, I do, and no, I don't,但是第一个答案Yes, I do,中的“do”选用那个具体单词,也可能是Have, Will ,Did,Would,Can ,Could,Had,Is,Are,was等单词,完全有提问的句子使用那个单词来决定;二第二个答案中的and no, I don't同样选用don't.,didn't.,wouldn't.,can't., won't.,aren't.,hadn‘t,couldn't,was'nt,则完全有第二个问题的使用的那个单词的反义词来决定,从不同句子对比单词do和don't的差异就决定了关键的答案准确性,而整个句子变换只要压码住就可以保证这些练习的流利理解记忆。

Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately? Do you know who it
  is?    Yes, I do, and no, I don't.
“Do” you think ---Yes, I “do”,
“Do” you know ---and no, I “don't”
  Have you interviewed other  people at the station? Did they  give you any information?  Yes, I have, and no, they didn't.
“Have” you interviewed ---Yes, I “have”,
“Did” they  give ---and no, they “didn't.”
  Will you be talking to Thomas  Ames? Would you like to see my  interview with him?  Yes, I will, and no, I wouldn't.
“ Will” you be ---Yes, I“ will”,
“ Would” you like ---and no, I“ wouldn't.”
    Did you know he owns land next  to the Nature Center? Can he  build apartments there?  Yes, I did, and no, he can't.
  “ Did” you know --- Yes, I“ did”,
“Can ”he  build --- and no, he“ can't.”
  Well, that's good to hear. Could I get you something to drink? Would you like something to eat?  Yes, you could, and no, I  wouldn't.
“Could” “I ”get --- Yes, you could,
“Would” you like ---and no, I  wouldn't
  Had you heard of Thomas Ames before you started this  investigation? Will you be asking him about Mirage Realty? Yes, I had, and no, I won't.
“Had” you heard ---Yes, I “had”
“Will ”you be ---and no, I won't.
  Is this interview over? Are there  any more questions? Yes, it is, and no, there aren't.
“Is” this ---Yes, it is,
“Are” there  ---and no, there“ aren't.”

2、He asked me if I:
He asked me if I thought someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.


  "Do you think someone is sabotaging the station deliberately?" he asked me.  He asked me if I thought  someone was sabotaging the  station deliberately.
Do you“ think ”--- if I “thought ”,
he asked “me”---He asked “me ”

  "Do you have any idea who it  is?" he asked me.  He asked me if I had any idea who it was.
Do you “have”---  if I “had ”,
he asked “me”.  He asked “me ”,
who it “ is”--- who it “was”

  "Can you give me some names?" he asked us.  He asked us if we could give him  some names.
“Can” you give me  ---if  we “could” give  “ him”  ,
  he asked “us”---.  He asked “us ”

  "Is Rita still upset about  retiring?" he asked her.  He asked her if Rita was still  upset about retiring.
“Is ”Rita still --- if Rita “was” still  ,
  he asked “her”.  He asked“ her ”

  "Are you going to run away with Terry?" I asked her.  I asked her if she was going to run away with Terry.
“Are you” going ---if “she was ”going ,
  I asked “her.”---  I asked“ her ”

  "Will Roger help find out what's  going on?" he asked them. He asked them if Roger would help find out what was going on.
“Will” Roger -- if Roger “would ”,
he asked“ them”. He asked“ them ”,
“what's”  going on--“-what was” going on.

  " Can we stop now?" they asked me. They asked me if they could stop now.
“Can” we(- they )  --- if “they”“ could ”,
“they ”asked me.---“ They ”asked me

3、According to Steven , he's ...:

" Steven says that he's  the best detective in Stamfoed." say... According to Steven , he's the best detective  in Stamford.

    Steven  says that he's the best detective in Stamford. According to Steven , he's the best detective in Stamford.
“Steven”  says that ---According to “Steven ”

  Rita thinks even I'm handsome.  According to Rita ,even I'm handsome.
“ Rita” thinks ---According to “Rita ”

  Jake says that Detective Modine is a nice guy.  According to Jake , Detective Modine is a nice guy.
“Jake” says that ---According to “Jake ”

  Both of them think there's a  connection with Thomas Ames.  According to both of them, there's a
connection with Thonas Ames.
“Both of them” think --- According to “both of them”

  We say the glove is the key to  solving the mystery.  According to us, the glovr is the key to silving the mestery.
“We” say --- According to “us”

  I think this lesson is over.  According to me , this lesson is over.
“I ”think --- According to “me ”


sunyuting1 2007-11-13 08:20
注:第八课与复习三文本中间缺页177页,已经打印补充完毕,原下载的学员请注意及时更正。


sunyuting1 2007-11-13 11:52
如何提高效率? 采用层层压码推进的办法即可解决。
  1、第一次练习逐个句子压码听懂,可以先练习一册看着听懂即可,别忘了每天一篇课文的日记;
  2、第二次利用点滴时间进行整理,整块时间才练习深度压码听懂篇章结构,一天完成一篇课文;
  3、在每课之间可以先简单些两句作为留空位置,一册完成以后再进行补充。
  4、在每天都有进步的情况下,每课的进度拉开距离,最后完成压码听懂的听说读写的全部层次。
  5、开始能不用的压码方法尽量减少,能在不练习压码抄写的情况下可以做到记忆文本的就不练习压码抄写,能不练习压码注音就能记住语音的就不练习压码注音,能不练习压码跟读就能自由回想说口语的就不练习压码跟读,能不练习压码写作的尽量减少写作的深度,这样先保证基本进度。
  6、在遇到理解记忆困难的时候再逐步加上其他压码方法。比如压码看光盘、压码抄写、压码注音、压码跟读、压码写作等等练习,最后听说读写找齐。


sunyuting1 2007-11-13 13:47
第十一册 复习三

一、基本词组:
1
reading.... report about ...to ...questions for you ...mind ...while...Take...twice with  pauses ...to write..so that ..you can remember ...what the questions are

reading the newspaper.
She finds a report about ...to ...
Lesten to ... But first , ...questions for you
to keep in  mind
while you listen.
Take .... Each question will be ...
read twice with  pauses for you to write.
You don't have to writ out ...
Just writ enogh so that ..
you can remember what ...
what the questions are
when you listen to the report.

Ready? Here's...
In what month does ...?
  About what percentage ...?
Why are they fewer ... than in 1989?
  What is ...?
What perstage ... doesn't ...  from ..?
After ..., what percentage ...?

listen ..reads  .., and write down ...you'll need to ---answer the questions.

This ia ...article,
Terry, Did you know  that
there are fewer ...
today than  ---there were
in 1989?
I thought
population was growing. 
Not the high school  population .
Let me read
you the whole article.
"In  the United States,
school year beging in September.
Most high school  graduations
occur in May or  June...s"
So you
start school in the fall
  finish in the spring.
  Everybody doed that. 
Not verybody.
Listen to this ...
"But a small ...,
about three  pecent of the total,
receive  their diplomas
in the middle of the school year." 
Well... three pecent.
I  mean,
that's not very many. 
Remamber,
we're  talking millions here.
Anyway..."
The number of high school graduates
in  the Unites States
has been  decreasing
since 1989.
This is because fewer children
  were born in the 1970s."
Fewer babies
in the seventies,
fewer high school  students
in the eighties.
That makes sense.

  "A good predictor of the  number
of high school  graduates
in a year
is the number
of children born 18  years earlier.
Currently,
the  number of graduates
is equal  to about ....
73 percent
of the  18-year-old population." 
That's not very good. 
Why? 73 percent is a lot.
Yes, but it means that...
some  27 percent
of our young  people
don't finish high  school.
That's a lot too.
You're right. It's too many,
really. . . 27 percent.
Everybody should finish high  school. . .
Here are some more statistics . . .
"Between 49 and 54 percent 
of high school graduates
begin college
in the fall
after  their high school  graduation."
That's about  half,
49 to 54 percent. 
Yeah. It means that ...
the  other half
doesn't go on to  college.
Or, maybe they do go on to  college . . .
but not the  same year
as they graduate
from high school.

answer the  questions.
One.  In what month does
the school  year
begin in the United States?
September.

Two.  About what percentage
of  students receive their diplomas
  in the spring? 
Ninety-seven percent.

  Three.  Why are there
fewer students  graduating now
than in 1989? 
Because fewer children
were born  in the 1970s.

  Four.  What is a good predictor
  of the  number of high school graduates? 
The number
of children born 18  years earlier.

  Five.    What percentage
of the 18-year- old population
doesn't graduate 
from high school?
About 27 percent.

Six.  After graduating
from high  school,
what percentage
of  students go on to college
the  same year?
Between 49 and 54 percent.


2、

Now let's listen to 。。。
some more 。。。between ...
They're still talking  about ...
the report on high school  graduates.
Listen carefully for
a  food item.
What food is  mentioned ..?

Well, what did you think ...?
  I don't know, Rita.
The  statistics are upsetting.
I mean,
the idea that ....
a quarter  of our young people
don't  finish high school,
and  then
half of those who do,
don't continue their  education . . .
  Are you worried about ..
our future, Terry?   
Our future-yours
and mine-looks wonderful, Rita.
But  the future for ...
our young  people?
I don't know. 
Someone should ask them if ...
they're worried.
The answers  might be interesting. 
Wait. Here's another article.
It's a report called ...
"What  Worries ...
American  Teenagers?"
Do you want me to...
  read it to you?
No . . . no, thanks, Rita.
Did I ever tell you that...
you  make me feel...
like a teenager? 
Oh, Terry.    And what worries me...
right  now is my stomach.
How  about a pizza?
  Oooooh!! I'd love one.

they're worried
  ask them
  if they're worried
  Someone should
  ask them if  they're worried.
  Someone should ask them if  they're worried.

  should ask them
  if  they're worried.
  Someone --- We.
  ask them ---Find out---Help them
  worried.---Upset--- In trouble
  should ---Must.
  if ---When

二、基本句子:

1、阅读报纸信息:
This ia a really interesting  article, Terry, Did you know  that there are fewer high school students today thant here were in 1989? Gee,I thought the  population was growing.  Not the high school population .Let me read you the whole article. It's very  short... Ahem... "In  the United States, the school year beging in September. Most high school  graduations occur in May or  June...s"  So you start school in the fall  and you finish in the spring.  Everybody does that.  Not verybody. Listen to this ... "But a small number of graduates, about three  pecent of the total, receive  their diplomas in the middle of the school year."  Well... three pecent. I  mean, that's not very many.  Three percent is three  percent. Remamber, we're  talking millions here.  Anyway..." The number of high school graduates in  the Unites States has been  decreasing since 1989. This is because fewer children  were born in the 1970s."  Fewer babies in the seventies, fewer high school  students in the eighties.  That makes sense.

  "A good predictor of the  number of high school  graduates in a year is the number of children born 18  years earlier. Currently, the  number of graduates is equal  to about 73 percent of the  18-year-old population."  That's not very good.  Why? 73 percent is a lot.  Yes, but it means that some  27 percent of our young  people don't finish high  school. That's a lot too.  You're right. It's too many,  really. . . 27 percent.  Everybody should finish high school. . . Here are some more statistics . . .  "Between 49 and 54 percent  of high school graduates  begin college in the fall after  their high school  graduation." That's about  half, 49 to 54 percent.    Yeah. It means that the  other half doesn't go on to  college. Or, maybe they do go on to  college . . . but not the  same year as they graduate from high school.


回答问题:
OK. Now try to answer the  questions. Ready?
Question One.  In what month does the school  year begin in the United States?  September.
  Question Two.  About what percentage of  students receive their diplomas  in the spring?  Ninety-seven percent.
  Question Three.  Why are there fewer students  graduating now than in 1989?  Because fewer children were born  in the 1970s.
  Question Four.  What is a good predictor of the  number of high school graduates?    The number of children born 18  years earlier.
    Question Five.    What percentage of the 18-year- old population doesn't graduate  from high school?  About 27 percent.
  Question Six.  After graduating from high  school, what percentage of  students go on to college the  same year? Between 49 and 54 percent.

2、
Someone should ask them if  they're worried.

"Find out." .. .  Someone should find out if  they're worried. 
"Upset." And you say. . .  Someone should find out if  they're upset.  Ready?

  Someone should ask them if  they're worried. 
Find out.  Someone should find out if  they're worried.
  Upset.  Someone should find out if  they're upset.
  We.      We should find out if they're  upset.
  Must.  We must find out if they're upset.
  Help them.  We must help them if they're  upset.
  In trouble.  We must help them if they're in trouble.
  When.  We must help them when they're in trouble.


三、场景学习reading the newspaper.:

Book Eleven, Review Three

1、引导语:

  Review Three. For this lesson, you'll need a pencil and a piece of paper. Rita is reading the newspaper. She finds a report about hight  school graduates and decides to read it to Terry. Lesten to their converstion. But first , here are some questions for you to keep in  mind while you listen. Take apencil and piece of paper. Each  question will be read twice with  pauses for you to write. You don't have to writ out the whole question. Just writ enogh so that you can remember what the questions are  when you listen to the report.

2、问题:

  Ready? Here's Quesion One.: In what month does the school  year begin in the United States?In what month does the school  year begin in the United Stases?
Quesion Two.  About what percentage of  students receive their diplomas in the sping? About what  percentage of stutents receive  their diplomas in the spring?
  Question Three.  Why are ther fewer students  graduating now than in 1989?  Why  are there fewer students  graduating now thwn in 1989?
  Quesion Four.  What is a good predictor of the  mumber of hight school graduates?  What is a good pradctor of the number of high school graduates?
  Question Five.What perstage of the 18-year-old  population doesn't graduate  from high school? What  percentage of the 18-year-old  population doesn't graduate feom high school.
  Quastion Six. After graduating from high school, what percentage of students go on to college the
same year? After graduating from high school, what percentage of  students go on to college the  same year?

3、引导语:

  Now listen carefully as Rita reads  the report, and write down you'll need to answer the questions.

4、情景:

  This ia a really interesting  article, Terry, Did you know  that there are fewer high  school students today than there were in 1989? Gee,I thought the  population was growing.  Not the high school  population .Let me read you the whole article. It's very  short... Ahem... "In  the United States, the  school year beging in September. Most high school  graduations occur in May or  June...s"  So you start school in the fall  and you finish in the spring.  Everybody doed that.  Not verybody. Listen to this ... "But a small number of graduates, about three  pecent of the total, receive  their diplomas in the middle of the school year."  Well... three pecent. I  mean, that's not very many.  Three percent is three  percent. Remamber, we're  talking millions here.  Anyway..." The number of high school graduates in  the Unites States has been  decreasing since 1989. This is because fewer children  were born in the 1970s."  Fewer babies in the seventies, fewer high school  students in the eighties.  That makes sense.

5、情景:

  "A good predictor of the  number of high school  graduates in a year is the number of children born 18  years earlier. Currently, the  number of graduates is equal  to about 73 percent of the  18-year-old population."  That's not very good.  Why? 73 percent is a lot.  Yes, but it means that some  27 percent of our young  people don't finish high school. That's a lot too.  You're right. It's too many,  really. . . 27 percent.  Everybody should finish high  school. . . Here are some more statistics . . .  "Between 49 and 54 percent  of high school graduates  begin college in the fall after  their high school  graduation." That's about  half, 49 to 54 percent.    Yeah. It means that the  other half doesn't go on to  college. Or, maybe they do go on to  college . . . but not the  same year as they graduate from high school.

6、练习答案:
    OK. Now try to answer the  questions. Ready? Question One.
  In what month does the school  year begin in the United States?  September.
  Question Two.  About what percentage of  students receive their diplomas  in the spring?  Ninety-seven percent.
  Question Three.  Why are there fewer students  graduating now than in 1989?  Because fewer children were born  in the 1970s.
  Question Four.  What is a good predictor of the  number of high school graduates?    The number of children born 18  years earlier.
    Question Five.    What percentage of the 18-year- old population doesn't graduate  from high school?  About 27 percent.
  Question Six.  After graduating from high  school, what percentage of  students go on to college the  same year? Between 49 and 54 percent.

四、场景学习:

1、引导语:

Now let's listen to some more of  the conversation between Rita  and Terry. They're still talking  about the report on high school  graduates. Listen carefully for a  food item. What food is  mentioned in this conversation?

2、情景:

  Well, what did you think of  the report?  I don't know, Rita. The  statistics are upsetting. I mean, the idea that a quarter  of our young people don't  finish high school, and  then half of those who do,  don't continue their  education . . .  Are you worried about  our future, Terry?    Our future-yours and mine-looks wonderful, Rita. But  the future for our young  people? I don't know.  Someone should ask them if  they're worried. The answers  might be interesting.    Wait. Here's another article.  It's a report called "What  Worries American  Teenagers?" Do you want me to  read it to you?  No . . . no, thanks, Rita.  Did I ever tell you that you  make me feel like a teenager?  Oh, Terry.    And what worries me right  now is my stomach. How  about a pizza?  Oooooh!! I'd love one.

3、学习:

  OK. What food is mentioned in  this conversation?  Pizza.

  Now listen and repeat.

    they're worried
  ask them if they're worried
  Someone should ask them if  they're worried.
  Someone should ask them if  they're worried.

4、引导学习:

  Now I say, "Find out." And you  say.. .  Someone should find out if  they're worried.  I say, "Upset." And you say. . .  Someone should find out if  they're upset.  Ready? Here we go.

5、练习:

    Someone should ask them if  they're worried. 
Find out.  Someone should find out if  they're worried.
  Upset.  Someone should find out if  they're upset.
  We.      We should find out if they're  upset.
  Must.  We must find out if they're upset.
  Help them.  We must help them if they're  upset.
  In trouble.  We must help them if they're in trouble.
  When.  We must help them when they're in trouble.


    This is the end of Review Three.


sunyuting1 2007-11-14 07:39
新增4个帖子,注意看贴。每天必看贴。


sunyuting1 2007-11-14 15:55
第十一册第九课

一、基本词组stop的用法:

  banck,end, finishes,wind up:

stop  bothering me ,get off my back.
Steven told Jake that .he couldn't  ...
.Steven said, "Jake, I can't ...:
end up ......  , finishes at ...., wind up :

1、stop  bothering me ,get off my back.

Who do you think
they're  talking  about

I know all that
but he was just  doing his ...
I  wish you would ...
stop  bothering me about this 
Maybe he is  ...
little ambitious
But I  can't control that. ..
I don't know anything about ...
get off my back.

idiomatic  way of saying ...
Stop bothering  me
He calls me ...
I wish he'd ;;;
stop bothering me
get off my back.   

Jake's always asking ... to ...
He really should ...
stop bothering her. 
get off her back.
Terry's just impossible.
Will he ever
stop bothering Rita?
ever get off Rita's back?
  I finally told them ...
if they didn't 
  stop bothering me,
I'd call the  police. 
I finally told them
if they didn't 
get off my back,
I'd call the  police.


2、can't stand Ames。。。
Steven told Jake that .he couldn't  ....Steven said, "Jake, I can't ...:


talking about ...
When did ...ask ...about ...

can't stand Ames
But he isn't trying ...
to stop you
He's been after...for some time.
He asked  ...
if he would sell....
  And he tried to buy it from  ...,
the previous  owner.
How much has  ...
told you about ...?
  Not much.
I've learned ....
We've had ....
  he's building  ... right next to ....
He's going to ...
ruin it.
Has he  ever said ...
anything about it  to you? 
Of course not.
is  not stupid.
How much has ...
he asked  you about me?
He just asked me...
if I would  take
you off the story.

I can't stand Ames
  Jake, I can't .....
  Steven said, "Jake, ...
I can't stand Ames."
  Steven said, "Jake, I ...
  can't stand Ames."
  he's building apartments
  Steven, he's ...right next to ....
  Jake said, "Steven, he's ...,."
 
  Steven told Jake that ...
...he couldn't  stand Ames.
.  Steven said, "Jake, ...
...I can't stand  Ames."
  Jake told Steven that...
...he was  building ....
Jake said, "Steven, he's building .....

Steven told Jake that ..... 
Steven said, "Jake,...."
  Jake told Steven that he was .....
Jake said, "Steven, he's ....."
  Steven told Jake that ....wouldn't be able to ....
  Steven said, "Jake, ....won't be able to ...."
  Jake told Steven that things ...
....couldn't be that bad. 
Jake said, "Steven,
things can't  be that bad."
  Steven told Jake that ...wasn't stupid.
Steven said, "Jake, ...isn't  stupid."
Jake told Steven that ... was ...
going to ruin the Nature Center. 
Jake said, "Steven, ...is
going to ruin the Nature  Center."
  Steven told Jake that ....
was a greedy, evil good- for-nothing. 
Steven said, "Jake, ...
is a greedy, evil good-for- nothing."

3、 end up ......  , finishes at ...., wind up :

  What does ...say ...?
What's that?
    It's for my stomach.
  My  doctor says I'm ...
  getting an ulcer.
  He says if  I don't ...
calm down,
  I'm going to...
  wind up in the hospital. 
  I'm going to
  figure this out. 
    We don't have  ....


  What does the doctor say ...?  An ulcer.

    wind up in the hospital
  I'm going to...
  wind up in the hospital

  To wind up means about ....
    the same as ...
    to finish or to end up.
    I'm going to end up
      in the  hospital. 
    I'm going to wind up ....
      The meeting finishes ....
    The meeting winds up .....

  I'm going to
    end up ...... 
    wind up .....
  The meeting
    finishes at 9:00.   
    winds up at 9:00.
    I wish he'd
    finish the report. 
    wind up the report.
    Will Peter Case ...
    end up with  nothing? 
    wind up with  nothing?
    Thomas Ames could
    end up in  jail. 
      Thomas Ames could
      wind up in  jail.
    Do you know when
      this lesson ends? 
    this lesson  winds up?
    It winds up right now.
    This is  the end ....

二、基本句子:

He calls me all the time; I wish  he'd stop bothering me.  I wish he'd get off my back.
Steven told Jake that he couldn't  stand Ames.  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand  Ames."
I'm going to wind up in the hospital

1、stop  bothering me ,get off my back.:

Who do you think they're  talking  about?Jake.



Stop bothering me.  Get off my back.
  He calls me all the time; I wish  he'd stop bothering me.  I wish he'd get off my back.
  Jake's always asking Chris to do things. He really should stop bothering her.    He really should get off her back.
  Terry's just impossible. Will he ever stop bothering Rita?  Will he ever get off Rita's back?
  I finally told them if they didn't  stop bothering me, I'd call the  police.  I finally told them if they didn't  get off my back, I'd call the  police.

2、 Steven told Jake that .he couldn't  ....Steven said, "Jake, I can't ...:

  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand Ames."
  Jake said, "Steven, he's building  apartments right next to the Nature Center."

Steven told Jake that he couldn't  stand Ames.
  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand  Ames."
  Jake told Steven that he was  building apartments right next to  the Nature Center. 
  Jake said, "Steven, he's building apartments right next to the Nature Center."


Steven told Jake that he couldn't  stand Ames.  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand  Ames."
  Jake told Steven that he was  building apartments right next to the Nature Center. Jake said, "Steven, he's building  apartments right next to the Nature Center."
  Steven told Jake that Peter Case  wouldn't be able to give the station away.  Steven said, "Jake, Peter Case  won't be able to give the station  away."
  Jake told Steven that things  couldn't be that bad.  Jake said, "Steven, things can't  be that bad."
  Steven told Jake that the man  wasn't stupid. Steven said, "Jake, the man isn't  stupid."
Jake told Steven that Ames was  going to ruin the Nature Center.  Jake said, "Steven, Ames is  going to ruin the Nature  Center."
  Steven told Jake that Thomas  Ames was a greedy, evil good- for-nothing.  Steven said, "Jake, Thomas  Ames is a greedy, evil good-for- nothing."


3、end up ......  , finishes at ...., wind up ,  : I'm going to wind up in the  hospital. 

I'm going to end up in the  hospital. 
  I'm going to wind up in the  hospital. 
The meeting finishes at 9:00. 
The meeting winds up at 9:00.

I'm going to end up in the  hospital.  I'm going to wind up in the  hospital.
  The meeting finishes at 9:00.    The meeting winds up at 9:00.
  I wish he'd finish the report.    I wish he'd wind up the report.
  Will Peter Case end up with  nothing?  Will Peter Case wind up with  nothing?
  Thomas Ames could end up in  jail.    Thomas Ames could wind up in  jail.
  Do you know when this lesson ends?  Do you know when this lesson  winds up?

  It winds up right now.

三、场景学习:

1、引导语:

  Welcome to Lesson Nine. Steven  is on the phone with Thomas  Ames. Who do you think they're
  talking  about?

2、情景:

    Yes, yes. I know all that,  Ames, but he was just  doing his job. He's a  reporter, and a good one. I  wish you would stop  bothering me about this  . . . Well, yes. Maybe he is  a little ambitious. But I  can't control that. . . No,  I don't know anything about this story. Listen,  Ames, get off my back.

3、学习:

    Well, who do you think they're  talking about?  Jake.

  Now listen and repeat.

  get off
  Get off my back.
  Get off my back.

4、引导学习:

  Get off my back is an idiomatic  way of saying "Stop bothering  me." Let's practice this  expression. I say, "Stop bothering  me." And you say. . .  Get off my back.  I say, "He calls me all the time; OK. Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Stop bothering me.  Get off my back.
  He calls me all the time; I wish  he'd stop bothering me.  I wish he'd get off my back.
  Jake's always asking Chris to do things. He really should stop bothering her.    He really should get off her back.
  Terry's just impossible. Will he ever stop bothering Rita?  Will he ever get off Rita's back?
  I finally told them if they didn't  stop bothering me, I'd call the  police.  I finally told them if they didn't  get off my back, I'd call the  police.

四、场景学习:

1、引导语:

Good. Now listen to Jake and  Steven talking about Thomas  Ames. When did Thomas Ames  ask Peter Case about buying  WEFL? Listen for the answer.

2、情景:

    Jake, I can't stand Ames.  But he isn't trying to buy  the station to stop you. He's been after the station for some time. He asked  Case if he would sell the  station to him six months  ago.  And he tried to buy it from  Sam Finch, the previous  owner. How much has  Ames told you about  himself?  Not much. I've learned a few things. We've had a  few meetings.  Steven, he's building  apartments right next to the Nature Center. He's going to ruin it. Has he  ever said anything about it  to you?  Of course not. The man is  not stupid. How much has he asked  you about me?  Nothing, until now. He just asked me if I would  take you off the story.

3、学习:

  OK. When did Thomas Ames  ask Peter Case about buying WEFL?  Six months ago.

    Now listen and repeat.

  I can't stand Ames
  Jake, I can't stand Ames.
  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand Ames."
  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand Ames."

  he's building apartments
  Steven, he's building apartments right next to the Nature Center.
  Jake said, "Steven, he's building apartments right next to the Nature Center."
  Jake said, "Steven, he's building  apartments right next to the Nature Center."

4、引导学习:

    Now you hear. . .  Steven told Jake that he couldn't  stand Ames.  And you say . . .  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand  Ames." You hear. . .  Jake told Steven that he was  building apartments right next to  the Nature Center.  And you say. . . Jake said, "Steven, he's building apartments right next to the Nature Center."  Ready? Here we go.

5、练习:

  Steven told Jake that he couldn't  stand Ames.  Steven said, "Jake, I can't stand  Ames."
  Jake told Steven that he was  building apartments right next to the Nature Center. Jake said, "Steven, he's building  apartments right next to the Nature Center."
  Steven told Jake that Peter Case  wouldn't be able to give the station away.  Steven said, "Jake, Peter Case  won't be able to give the station  away."
  Jake told Steven that things  couldn't be that bad.  Jake said, "Steven, things can't  be that bad."
  Steven told Jake that the man  wasn't stupid. Steven said, "Jake, the man isn't  stupid."
Jake told Steven that Ames was  going to ruin the Nature Center.  Jake said, "Steven, Ames is  going to ruin the Nature  Center."
  Steven told Jake that Thomas  Ames was a greedy, evil good- for-nothing.  Steven said, "Jake, Thomas  Ames is a greedy, evil good-for- nothing."

五、场景学习:

1、引导语:

  Now let's listen to the end of the conversation between Steven  and Jake. What does the doctor  say Steven is getting? Listen carefully for the answer.

2、情景:

      What's that?  It's for my stomach. My  doctor says I'm getting an ulcer. He says if  I don't  calm down, I'm going to wind up in the hospital.  You are too nervous. Don't  worry, Steven. I'm going to  figure this out.  Hurry, Jake. We don't have  much time.

3、学习:

  OK. What does the doctor say Steven is getting?  An ulcer.

  Now listen and repeat.

  windup
  wind up in the hospital
  I'm going to wind up in the hospital
  I'm going to wind up in the  hospital.

4、引导学习:

  To wind up means about the same as to finish or to end up. Let's  practice this verb. You hear. .    I'm going to end up in the  hospital.  And you say . . .  I'm going to wind up in the  hospital.    You hear. . .  The meeting finishes at 9:00.  And you say. . . The meeting winds up at 9:00.  All right. Let's begin.

5、练习:

  I'm going to end up in the  hospital.  I'm going to wind up in the  hospital.
  The meeting finishes at 9:00.    The meeting winds up at 9:00.
  I wish he'd finish the report.    I wish he'd wind up the report.
  Will Peter Case end up with  nothing?  Will Peter Case wind up with  nothing?
  Thomas Ames could end up in  jail.    Thomas Ames could wind up in  jail.
  Do you know when this lesson ends?  Do you know when this lesson  winds up?

  It winds up right now. This is  the end of Lesson Nine.


sunyuting1 2007-11-14 16:00
第十一册第九课总结
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 103 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-11-14 16:42
第十一册 第十课

一、基本词组:

too与either的用法,
the与a or an, 及some的用法,
Do you want .,.Would you mind...,could you的用法

1、too,either的用法:

likes to....,does too.
has never....  , hasn't either.
Judy can't .... can't either.
is ..., is too.
    brought ..., did too.
    couldn't ....  couldn't  either. 

and Judy does too,
and Judy is too,
her sister hasn't either,
and I can't either

how she makes  comparisons,
telling us what they  do
and what they don't do.

I have ...who are
identical twins.
Their names are 
Jane and Judy.
They're so much  alike that ...
even I can't always tell  ...
them apart,
and I'm their  mother!
They even
think and act  alike.
For example,
Jane likes to
  play basketball,
and Judy does  too.
Jane is
good at mathematics
and Judy is too.
But when it 
comes to English,
Jane has
never  enjoyed it,
and her sister hasn't  either.
They studied English
for  years with the best teachers,
but  Jane never
received good grades,
and Judy didn't either.
That's  because
both girls can't spell.
  Not even the easiest words.
And  you know what?
I can't either!

    and Judy does too
    Jane likes to play basketball   
    and Judy is too
    Jane is good at mathematics
      her sister hasn't either
      Jane has never enjoyed English
      and I can't either
      both girls can't spell

    you're going to hear ....
    Combine both  sentences into one sentence,
    Jane likes to .... Judy  likes to ---Jane likes to ..., and  Judy does too. 
    Jane has never .... Her sister has never ....  --- Jane has never ...,  and her sister hasn't either.

    play basketball.
    enjoyed English.
    spell.
    a good tennis player.
  brought a turkey sandwich  for lunch. 
    answer any  questions.   

  Jane likes to...., and Judy does too.
  Jane has never....  , and her sister hasn't either.
  Jane and Judy can't .... and  their mother can't either.
    Rita is ..., and  Mike is too.
  Terry brought ..., and Steven did too.
  Chris couldn't ....  and Jake couldn't  either.   

2、 in --in the :

      listen to ...between ....
They're discussing
who might have
sabotaged the station.
.. has just told ...
that he thinks 
she's responsible.
Notice the use of
the definite article
the to refer  to things that
are familiar or that 
have already been referred to. 

You were around
every  time it happened.
You have no
vested interest in  the station. 
This is so ...
unfair of you.
I  don't know how ...
you could  possibly think that ...
I had anything to do with it.
  Come on, Chris.
You had ...
access to the editing room. 
What were you
doing here  late one night?
Was that you
sneaking  around that night?
You're the one
under  investigation.

  in the station 
  you have no vested interest
  to the editing room
  you had access   
 
Now you're going to hear ..
Each of these  sentences
should have
the  definite article
the Repeat each sentence,
putting the definite article
in front of the appropriate noun. 
  Chris works in ...
news department of WEFL.   
She has no
vested interest in station. 

Chris works
in news department  of WEFL----in the news  department of WEFL.
  She has no vested interest
in station.---in the  station.   
The meeting will take place
in  conference room---in the conference room.
  There are editing rooms and  control rooms
at station.---at the station.
  When pizza arrived,
she offered  some
to the detective.  ---to the detective.

3、 the, a or an, and some用法的正误:

a student and her  teacher.
Notice how they use  the, a or an, and some.

  I have  a ...
Do you have some..? 
. What's the  problem? 
  I'd like some advice.
I have to 
write a paper for my European
History course.
Is the paper about France?
I am a  French teacher,
after all.
Yes, it is.
I have some...
problems understanding
the French system of government. 
I understand the problem
you're  having.
Let's get some
coffee in  the cafeteria.
Maybe I can find a...
  simple explanation
of France's government.
Oh, thanks, Mr. Douglas.

    Do you have ..
    some time to help  me?
  I'd like some advice.
    I have some problems.
    Let's get some coffee.
    I have to write a paper.
  I am a French teacher,
  after all.
    Maybe I can find
    a simple  explanation.
    What's the problem?
    Is the paper
  about France?
    I understand
  the problem you're  having.
 
Now you're going to hear
  a  sentence read two ways.
One way  will have
an incorrect form
  of  either the, a, or some.
  The other  will have
    the correct form. 
    Repeat the sentence
    with the correct form.
  For example, you  hear.. .

  Do you have (a time)---some time ...?   
  What's (a problem)--  the problem?   
  Do you have (a time ) ---some time ...
    to help  me?   
    What's (a  problem)--- the problem?
  I have to write ( the paper)  ---a paper.
  I'd like (the advice)--- some advice.
  I have (the  problems)---some problems.
  Let's get (the coffee )--- some coffee ...in the cafeteria.

4、需求礼貌用语---Do you want ...Would you mind...:

  Do you want ...
    Would you mind...
    form a  polite request:
  like:
  hand me a plate
  handing me a napkin

how each one requests the other to do things.

  Do you want ...
    some pizza?  Thank you. 
    Could you ...
    please hand me a plate?
    Delighted. 
  Here's a slice for you. 
  Thank you.
    Would you mind...
    handing me a napkin?  Sure.

    hand me a plate
    Could you please ...?
 
  handing me a napkin
    Would you mind ...?
 
  hear a  command,
    like "Hand me a  plate"
      or "Hand me a napkin," 
      followed by a cue word:
      either  could or would.
      use the cue word 
      and the command to
      form a  polite request.
      For example, you  hear.. .

      Hand me a napkin. . . would. 
      Would you mind ....
      handing me a napkin?
      Pass me a plate . . . could. 
      Could you please...
      pass me a plate? 

    Hand me a napkin. . . would. 
        Would you mind ...?
        Pass me a plate . . . could. 
        Could you ...?
        Help me with my homework. . .  would. 
          Would you mind ....
          helping me  with my homework?
          Tell me what time it is . . .  could. 
          Could you please.... ....?
          Speak more slowly, please. . .  would.
          Would you mind....?
          Tell me the meaning of these  words . . . could.
            Could you please....?

        And now, could you please ....
        go on  to the next lesson?

二、基本句子:

too: Jane likes to play basketball, and Judy does too.
either:Jane has never enjoyed English,  and her sister hasn't either. 

the:You have no vested interest in  the station.   
some: Do you have some time  to  help  me?
a:    I have to write  a  paper.
   
Could: Could you please hand me a  plate?
  Would: Would you mind handing me a  napkin?

1、too,rither的用法:

Jane likes to play basketball, and Judy does too.
Jane has never enjoyed English, and her sister hasn't either.
Both girls can't spell, and I can't either.
Jane is good at mathematics, and  Judy is too.

Jane likes to play basketball. Judy  likes to play basketball. 
Jane likes to play basketball, and  Judy does too. 
  Jane has never enjoyed English. Her sister has never enjoyed  English.
  Jane has never enjoyed English,  and her sister hasn't either. 

Jane likes to play basketball. Judy likes to play basketball.  Jane likes to play basketball, and Judy does too.
  Jane has never enjoyed English. Her sister has never enjoyed English.  Jane has never enjoyed English,  and her sister hasn't either.
  Jane and Judy can't spell. Their mother can't spell.  Jane and Judy can't spell, and  their mother can't either.
    Rita is a good tennis player.  Mike is a good tennis player.  Rita is a good tennis player, and  Mike is too.
  Terry brought a turkey sandwich  for lunch.  Steven brought a turkey sandwich  for lunch.  Terry brought a turkey sandwich for  lunch, and Steven did too.
  Chris couldn't answer any  questions. Jake couldn't answer  any questions.
  Chris couldn't answer any  questions, and Jake couldn't  either.   

2、 in --in the 用法的正误及其改错:

You have no vested interest in  the station.   
You had access to the editing room.     

Chris works in news department of WEFL.
== Chris works in the news department of WEFL.

She has no vested interest in station.
==She has no vested interest in the station.

Chris works in news department  of WEFL.  == Chris works in the news  department of WEFL.
  She has no vested interest in station.  ==    She has no vested interest in the  station.   
  The meeting will take place in  conference room. == The meeting will take place in the conference room.
  There are editing rooms and  control rooms at station. ==There are editing rooms and  control rooms at the station.
  When pizza arrived, she offered  some to the detective. == When the pizza arrived, she  offered some to the detective.

3、判断选择正误a,an,the,some的用法:

  Do you have some time  to  help  me?
    I'd like  some  advice.
  I have  some  problems.
    Let's get  some  coffee.
    I have to write  a  paper.
    I am  a  French teacher, after all.
    Maybe I can find  a  simple  explanation.
    What's  the  problem?
    Is the paper about France?
    I understand the problem you're  having.
 
  Do you have a time (to )help me?  Do you have some time to help  me? == Do you have some time to help  me?   
  What's the problem? What's( a  ) problem?  ==What's the problem?
  I have to write a paper. I have to write (the) paper.  ==  I have to write a paper.
  I'd like( the) advice. I'd like some  advice.==  I'd like some advice.
  I have some problems. I have (the )  problems. == I have some problems.
  Let's get some coffee in  the cafeteria.  Let's get (the )coffee in the  cafeteria.  ==Let's get some coffee in the cafeteria.

4、Could , Would 需求礼貌用语:

Could you please hand me a  plate?
  Would you mind handing me a  napkin?

  Hand me a napkin. . . would. 
  Would you mind handing me a  napkin?

Pass me a plate . . . could. 
Could you please pass me a plate?

  Hand me a napkin. . . would.  Would you mind handing me a  napkin?
  Pass me a plate . . . could.  Could you please pass me a plate?
  Help me with my homework. . .  would.    Would you mind helping me  with my homework?
  Tell me what time it is . . .  could.  Could you please tell me what  time it is?
  Speak more slowly, please. . .  would.  Would you mind speaking more  slowly, please?
    Tell me the meaning of these  words . . . could.  Could you please tell me the  meaning ofthese words?

三、场景学习
场景twin daughters Jane  and Judy. ,too,either的用法:

1、引导语:

    This is Lesson Ten.  Listen to this woman as she tells  us about her twin daughters, Jane  and Judy. Notice how she makes  comparisons, telling us what they  do and what they don't do.

2、情景:

    I have two daughters who are identical twins. Their names are  Jane and Judy. They're so much  alike that even I can't always tell  them apart, and I'm their  mother! They even think and act  alike. For example, Jane likes to  play basketball, and Judy does  too. Jane is good at mathematics  and Judy is too. But when it  comes to English, Jane has never  enjoyed it, and her sister hasn't  either. They studied English for  years with the best teachers, but  Jane never received good grades, and Judy didn't either. That's  because both girls can't spell.  Not even the easiest words. And  you know what? I can't either!

3、学习:

      Now listen and repeat.

      and Judy does too
      Jane likes to play basketball
      Jane likes to play basketball, and Judy does too.
      Jane likes to play basketball, and Judy does too.

      and Judy is too
      Jane is good at mathematics
      Jane is good at mathematics, and Judy is too.
      Jane is good at mathematics, and  Judy is too.

      her sister hasn't either
      Jane has never enjoyed English
      Jane has never enjoyed English, and her sister hasn't either.
      Jane has never enjoyed English, and her sister hasn't either.

      and I can't either
      both girls can't spell
      Both girls can't spell, and I can't  either.
      Both girls can't spell, and I can't either.

  4、引导学习Combine both  sentences into one sentence:
 
  Now you're going to hear two  sentences. Combine both  sentences into one sentence, Hke  this. You hear. . .    Jane likes to play basketball. Judy  likes to play basketball.  And you say . . .  Jane likes to play basketball, and  Judy does too.    Or you hear. . .  Jane has never enjoyed English. Her sister has never enjoyed  English.  And you say. . .  Jane has never enjoyed English,  and her sister hasn't either.  All right. Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Jane likes to play basketball. Judy likes to play basketball.  Jane likes to play basketball, and Judy does too.
  Jane has never enjoyed English. Her sister has never enjoyed English.  Jane has never enjoyed English,  and her sister hasn't either.
  Jane and Judy can't spell. Their mother can't spell.  Jane and Judy can't spell, and  their mother can't either.
    Rita is a good tennis player.  Mike is a good tennis player.  Rita is a good tennis player, and  Mike is too.
  Terry brought a turkey sandwich  for lunch.  Steven brought a turkey sandwich  for lunch.  Terry brought a turkey sandwich for  lunch, and Steven did too.
  Chris couldn't answer any  questions. Jake couldn't answer  any questions.
  Chris couldn't answer any  questions, and Jake couldn't  either.   

四、场景学习----in --in the 用法的正误及其改错:


1、引导语:

    Now listen to part of the  dialogue between Chris and  Detective Modine. They're discussing who might have sabotaged the station. Modine has just told Chris that he thinks  she's responsible. Notice the use of the definite article the to refer  to things that are familiar or that  have already been referred to.  Ready? Listen.

2、情景:

  You were around every  time it happened. You  have no vested interest in the station.  This is so unfair of you. I don't know how you could  possibly think that I had anything to do with it.  Come on, Chris. You had access to the editing room.    What were you doing here  late one night?  Was that you sneaking  around that night?  You're the one under  investigation.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  in the station 
  in the station
  you have no vested interest
  you have no vested interest
  You have no vested interest in  the station.   
  You have no vested interest in  the station.   

  to the editing room
  to the editing room
  you had access   
  you had access   
  You had access to the editing  room.       
  You had access to the editing room.     

4、引导学习:
 
  Now you're going to hear some  sentences. Each of these  sentences should have the  definite article the. Repeat each sentence, putting the definite  article in front of the appropriate noun. For example, you  hear.. .   
  Chris works in news department of WEFL. And you say. . . Chris works in the news department of WEFL.Or you hear. . . She has no vested interest in station. And you say. . . She has no vested interest in the station. All right. Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Chris works in news department  of WEFL. =  Chris works in the news  department of WEFL.
  She has no vested interest in station.  =    She has no vested interest in the  station.   
  The meeting will take place in  conference room.  =The meeting will take place in the conference room.
  There are editing rooms and  control rooms at station. =There are editing rooms and  control rooms at the station.
  When pizza arrived, she offered  some to the detective.  =When the pizza arrived, she  offered some to the detective.

五、场景学习:

1、引导语:

  Now listen to this conversation between a student and her  teacher. Notice how they use  the, a or an, and some.

2、情景;

  Excuse me, Mr. Douglas. I have  a small problem. Do you have some time to help me?    Of course, Melanie. What's the  problem?    I'd like some advice. I have to  write a paper for my European  History course. Is the paper about France? I am a  French teacher, after all. Yes, it is. I have some problems  understanding the French system  of government.  I understand the problem you're  having. Let's get some coffee in  the cafeteria. Maybe I can find a  simple explanation of France's government. Oh, thanks, Mr. Douglas.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

    Do you have some time to help  me?
  Do you have some time to help  me?
  I'd like some advice.
  I'd like some advice.
  I have some problems.
  I have some problems.
  Let's get some coffee.
  Let's get some coffee.

  I have to write a paper.
  I have to write a paper.
  I am a French teacher, after all.
  I am a French teacher, after all.
  Maybe I can find a simple  explanation.
  Maybe I can find a simple  explanation.

  What's the problem?
  What's the problem?
  Is the paper about France?
  Is the paper about France?
  I understand the problem you're  having.
  I understand the problem you're  having.

4、引导学习:

  Now you're going to hear a  sentence read two ways. One way  will have an incorrect form of  either the, a, or some. The other  will have the correct form.  Repeat the sentence with the  correct form. For example, you  hear.. .

  Do you have a time to help me?  Do you have some time to help  me?    And you say . . .    Do you have some time to help  me?        Or you hear. . .  What's the problem? What's a problem?  And you say. . .    What's the problem?    OK? Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Do you have a time to help me?  Do you have some time to help  me?   
  Do you have some time to help  me?   
  What's the problem? What's a  problem?  What's the problem?
  I have to write a paper. I have to write the paper.    I have to write a paper.
  I'd like the advice. I'd like some  advice.  I'd like some advice.
  I have some problems. I have the  problems.  I have some problems.
  Let's get some coffee in  the cafeteria.  Let's get the coffee in the  cafeteria.  Let's get some coffee in the cafeteria.

六、场景学习

需求的礼貌用语 Do you want ...Would you mind...:

1、引导语:

  To end this lesson, let's listen to  some more of the conversation  between Chris and Detective  Modine. Notice how each one  requests the other to do things.

2、情景:

    Do you want some pizza?  Thank you.    Could you please hand me  a plate?  Delighted.  Here's a slice for you.  Thank you. Would you mind handing me a  napkin?  Sure.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  hand me a plate
  hand me a plate
  Could you please hand me a  plate?
  Could you please hand me a  plate?

  handing me a napkin
  handing me a napkin
  Would you mind handing me a  napkin?
  Would you mind handing me a napkin?

4、引导学习could or would  polite request:

  Now you're going to hear a  command, like "Hand me a  plate" or "Hand me a napkin,"  followed by a cue word: either  could or would. use the cue word  and the command to form a  polite request. For example, you  hear.. .

  Hand me a napkin. . . would.  And you say. . .  Would you mind handing me a  napkin? Or you hear. . .  Pass me a plate . . . could.  And you say . . . Could you please pass me a plate?  OK? Let's begin.

5、练习:

    Hand me a napkin. . . would.  Would you mind handing me a  napkin?
  Pass me a plate . . . could.  Could you please pass me a plate?
  Help me with my homework. . .  would.    Would you mind helping me  with my homework?
  Tell me what time it is . . .  could.  Could you please tell me what  time it is?
  Speak more slowly, please. . .  would.  Would you mind speaking more  slowly, please?
    Tell me the meaning of these  words . . . could.  Could you please tell me the  meaning ofthese words?

    And now, could you please go on  to the next lesson? This is the end of Lesson Ten.


sunyuting1 2007-11-15 15:10
深度听清的基本方法是压码听懂的基本技能
    刚才看到ligengbeng 和星空关于磁带音和音标音区别的对话,这是一个关键问题,要一次压码回想出来磁带的语音,而不是复述出来音标读音才能做到自己学到的磁带一直的语音,这就是深度听清可以压码听懂的原因。下面我讲解以下压码深度听清的几个基本练习:
  1、压码一个句子:
  关注吸气,不关注吸气,吸气用短暂的换气代替。听到一个句子以后,用力慢慢不发声回想,每个句子压码回想的频率都统一到句子结束以后开始。
  2、多重压码一个句子几遍:
  方法同压码一个句子,通道一个句子后,用呼气用力不出声回想每个句子多遍,每个句子回想两遍就双重压码,回想三遍叫三重压码。。。
  3、压码长句子:
  一个句子单词数超过7个单词的叫做长句子,听到一个长句子可以只压码句子的自然分段部分,一直在听到一段时间的语音以后进行回想,基本保持二者时间距离压码回想到磁带结束为止。
  4、压码多个句子:
  以吸气作为压码长度的标准,吸气听完一个句子后开始回想,练习压码一个句子(和压码一个句子不关吸气只管呼气压码不同),只要延长吸气的长度就延长了压码的句子长度,吸气到两个句子开始压码回想叫做压码两个句子,吸气到三个句子后开始压码回想叫做压码三个句子。
  5、连环压码句子:
  听到每个句子后进行用力呼气不出声回想多次,完成一个句子的多重压码,然后第二个句子用力不出声压码回想多次,再前后两个句子回想一次,再快速多次压码第三个句子,然后前面的三个句子一起压码回想一次。。。
  6、压码回想若干长句子:
  这是压码长句子和压码多个句子的综合应用,对于压码听清到压码听懂意义特别重大。方法采用深吸一口气,用力缓慢呼气回想,注意采用调整呼吸的先吸气后呼气练习即可,因为练习呼气可以最高达到一口气40个句子的能力,所以压码多个长句子就比较容易,特别是对于互动磁带的复杂句子合成训练,对于两个或者三个长句子合成一个更长的更复杂的句子,一般学员可能在回想的时候多次练习也不容易全部准确记忆语音,所以如果采用这个练习立即就记住了组合句子的语音中的所有单词的准确连贯读音,其实记住了语音也就基本可以理解了,原来理解复杂句子就是这么容易。
    因为我们练习调整呼吸已经练习到一口气40个句子的能力,还没有用腹部呼吸方法,这时候只要你继续练习,仍然有进一步提高压码长度的能力,经实验开始你可以深吸一口气来练习,大约可以练习到一口气压码一个段落的能力,特别是一人说话若干个句子以后才换人的情景对话部分,是互动磁带理解记忆完整的难点,这样练习就一次实现了突破。
  练习完深吸一口气进行压码以后,可能你会在吸气的时候丢掉句子的部分语音,没有关系,只要你练习出来了一口气压码一些句子而不是压码多个句子的方法(压码多个句子最多只能达到压码三个句子),你就可以练习吸气和呼气协调压码,往往你可以做到压码的速度非常缓慢,死死压码压码语音的细节和节奏,就将意思全部准确的压出来了。
    这时压码回想的情况,如果你进行压码跟读,除了上面的方法外,你还可以采用腹部呼吸压码,因为腹部呼吸你可以达到一口气跟读无数个句子,按小时计算,成千上外的句子。所以如果你将它转换成压码的速度和快速的频率又会有很大的收获。
  压码法的潜力仍然是巨大的,远远还没有到达全部挖掘出来的时候,大家只要进行不同形式的组合训练,你呼发现你才是最棒的英语理解记忆高手。
  还有高级篇阅读与复习互动磁带文本,听完一段情景对话,特别是朗读一段报纸以后,进行理解记忆信息的练习,理解记忆信息难度是很大的,这时你的调整呼吸的连环压码多个长句子就派上了用场。
  我们最后努力的目标是,听完一段长的语音,能够全部压码出来,即以语音和文本,压码中理解整个段落的意思,对于信息的提问和回答都能够准确无误,这样你的英语就会有一个大的飞跃。
  目前我们还需要继续练习整理文本的工作,将文本整个语言篇章组合归纳理解记忆基本单元,剩下的工作就交给调整呼吸连环压码了。
  过去我们辅导学员一般只要求压码听清一个句子,和简单的深度听清,在练习压码听懂过程中,我们就慢慢学会了不同类型和难度的深度听清。
对于练习了压码听懂以后,原来压码直通车后面的压码一边看懂电影和一边读懂报纸的练习就变得更加简单了。因为我们慢慢发现我们练习压码听懂根本就不需要练习压码看电影,只有真正遇到压码听懂难度的时候,才需要看一下电影帮助理解记忆,加加速而已。
 


sunyuting1 2007-11-17 16:57
第十一册 第十一课

一、基本词组

1、someone,  something, anyone, anything, no one, and nothing.:

This is .... Listen to ...between ...
woman who says she can...
information about what ...on ....
Notice how ,,,,,
the following  words are used:
someone, 
something,
anyone,
anything,
no one,
  and nothing.

  You've  agreed to ....about ....
Is that correct?
That's right,
Detective LePage. 
You didn't see
anyone
enter the  building, did you? 
Yes. I saw
someone
come in  .... 
He wasn't carrying
anything,
was  he?
Yes. He was carrying
something 
in his hands.
It looked like a box. 
And he didn't say
anything,
I  suppose.
  He said
nothing
at first.
Then,  when he got to...,
he said
something. 
What did he say?
  He said, "Pizza delivery!" 
What happened after that?:
  Nothing happened.
No one
was  at home.
So he turned around
and left the building. 
And you think he had
something
to do with the robbery?
Of course not!
He had
nothing 
to do with it.
But you asked me  what I saw,
and I told you.
Now  is there
anything
else you'd like  me
to help you with?

  I'm sure there's 
nothing else
we can get from  you.   

  anyone enter the building
  you didn't see anyone
  someone come in around 9:00  P.M.   
  I saw someone come in'
    He wasn't carrying anything.
    He was carrying something.
  nothing at first   
  He said nothing at first.   
  Nothing happened.
  No one was at home.
 
  hear a  sentence
with a missing word.
Then you will hear two words. 
One of them is the missing word, 
and the other word is incorrect.
Repeat the sentence,
putting in  the missing word.

  I saw . . . enter the building.   
Someone. . . anyone. 
I saw someone enter ....

He was carrying . . . in his hands. 
Anything . . . something. 
  He was carrying something...

  There was . . . in the hall. 
  Anyone. . . no one. 
There was no one in the hall.

    I have. . . to say. . . 
Something . . . anything. 
I have something to say . . .

2、

  Now listen to...between..., after ....
    Notice the use of the  expression
    be supposed to 
      in the past tense.

    Hi. What happened
      to you?   
      You weren't supposed to
      see  me like this.
    You were
    supposed to
    be here an hour ago.
    I had to meet with Steven.
      I'm sorry. 
    This isn't what  was...
      supposed to happen. 
      What was
    supposed to  happen? 
    You were ...
    supposed to
    come  in
    and I was
    supposed to
    look  beautiful.
    I was
    supposed to
      look calm and cool.
    You  were
    supposed to
    forget all about
    the disagreement we had.
    You were
    supposed to
    fall madly in love with me.

  ....to see me like this
  you weren't supposed to...
 
  ... to be here an hour ago
    you were supposed to...
 
  .... what was supposed to happen
    this isn't what  ... 
   
  ... to fall madly in love with me
  you were supposed to....
 
  Now you're going to hear
    a  sentence
    in the past tense.
    Using  that sentence
  and the expression
  be supposed to,
  make a new  sentence saying
    that the opposite was expected.

    You saw  me like this. 
    You weren't supposed to
    see me  like this.
    Jake didn't
    fall madly in love  with Chris. 
  Jake was
    supposed to
  fall madly in love with Chris.

  You saw me like this.   
    You weren't supposed to ...

  Jake didn't
    fall madly in love  with Chris. 
    Jake was supposed  to ...

  This accident happened. 
    This accident
  wasn't supposet to happen.   

  Detective Modine didn't
    solve the mystery quickly.
  ....  was supposed  to .......

  Chris didn't
    look calm and cool. 
  ...was supposed to ....

3、

  Now listen to ....women
  .who's ...to ...in ... for ...for ....
    Notice how she uses the  expression
    be supposed to
    in the  present tense.

    When your ...,  remember you're...
    supposed to be  very quiet.
    He's not supposed to 
    know we're planning
    a party for  him.
    And you're not
    supposed to 
    mention the presents
  hidden in  the closet.
    He's supposed to
    think this is just an ordinary  visit.
    When I come in
  with the cake,
  everyone is
    supposed to  shout,
    "Surprise!"
    and sing  "Happy Birthday" to him.
    Is that  clear,
    children? Children!

Be supposed to
    in the present  tense
    is used to talk about  expected actions
  that are  customary or advisable.

  ...be very quiet
  you're supposed to be...
 
  ...to know we're planning a party  for him
  he's not supposed to know...

  ....to think this is just an ordinary  visit
  he's supposed to think....

  Now you'll hear a phrase
  followed by a subject.
  Use the  subject,
  the phrase,
  and the expression
    be supposed to
  in the present tense
  to talk about a  customary
  or advisable action.

  Be very quiet. . . you. 
  You're supposed to be ...

  Not know we're planning a party  for him . . . he. 
  He's not supposed to know .... 

  Listen to their mother . . .  children.
    Children are supposed to listen ....

  Not park in front of a fire hydrant. . . drivers.
    Drivers are not supposed to park ...

  Not tell lies to the police. . .  people being questioned. 
  People being questioned are not  supposed to tell ...



二、基本句子:

1、

  You didn't see anyone enter the building. 
    I saw someone come in around  9:00 P.M.   
  He wasn't carrying anything.
  He was carrying something.
  He said nothing at first. 
  Nothing happened.
  No one was at home.

  I saw . . . enter the building.  Someone. . . anyone.  I saw someone enter the building.
He was carrying . . .in his hands. Anything. . .something. He was carrying something in his hands.       
  There was . . . in the hall.  Anyone. . . no one.  There was no one in the hall.
    I have. . . to say. . .  Something . . . anything.    I have something to say . . .

2、

  You werent supposed to see me  like this.   
    You were supposed to be here an hour ago.   
    This isn't what was supposed to  happen.   
    You were supposed to fall madly  in love with me.   

    You saw me like this. 
  You weren't supposed to see me like this. 

  Jake didn't fall madly in love  with Chris. 
  Jake was supposed to fall madly in love with Chris.

  You saw me like this.    You weren't supposed to see me  like this.   
  Jake didn't fall madly in love  with Chris.      Jake was supposed to fall madly  in love with Chris.
  This accident happened.  This accident wasn't supposet  to happen.   
  Detective Modine didn't solve the mystery quickly.  Detective Modine was supposed  to solve the mystery quickly.
  Chris didn't look calm and cool.  Chris was supposed to look calm and cool.

3、  expression be supposed to in the present tense:

  You're supposed to be very quiet.
  He's not supposed to know we're  planning a party for him.
  He's supposed to think this is just  an ordinary visit.

  Be very quiet. . . you. 
  You're supposed to be very quiet.

  Not know we're planning a party  for him . . . he.
  He's not supposed to know we're  planning a party for him. 

  Be very quiet. . . you.  You're supposed to be very quiet.
  Not know we're planning a party  for him. . . he.  He's not supposed to know we're  planning a party for him.
  Listen to their mother . . .  children.  Children are supposed to listen to their mother.
  Not park in front of a fire hydrant. . . drivers.  Drivers are not supposed to park  in front of a fire hydrant.
  Not tell lies to the police. . .  people being questioned.    People being questioned are not  supposed to tell lies to the  police.

三、场景学习:

1、引导语:

    This is Lesson Eleven. Listen to this conversation between a detective and a woman who says she can give him information about what  happened on the night of a  crime. Notice how the following  words are used: someone,  something, anyone, anything, no one,
  and nothing. Ready? Listen.

2、情景:

    All right, Mrs. Dolgin. You've  agreed to answer a few questions  about the robbery in your neighbor's  apartment. Is that correct?  That's right, Detective LePage.  You didn't see anyone enter the  building, did you?  Yes. I saw someone come in  around 9:00 P.M. A man.  He wasn't carrying anything, was  he?  Yes. He was carrying somethin  in his hands. It looked like a box.  And he didn't say anything, I  suppose.  He said nothing at first. Then,  when he got to my neighbor's  apartment, he said something.  What did he say?  He said, "Pizza delivery!"    What happened after that?:    Nothing happened. No one was  at home. So he turned around  and left the building.  And you think he had something  to do with the robbery?  Of course not! He had nothing  to do with it. But you asked me  what I saw, and I told you. Now  is there anything else you'd like  me to help you with?

3、学习:

    No, Mrs. Dolgin. I'm sure there's  nothing else we can get from  you.   

  Now listen and repeat.

  anyone enter the building
  you didn't see anyone
  You didn't see anyone enter the  building.   
  You didn't see anyone enter the building. 

  someone come in around 9:00  P.M.   
  I saw someone come in'
  I saw someone come in around  9:00 P.M.   
  I saw someone come in around  9:00 P.M.   

  carrying anything   
  He wasn't carrying anything.
  He wasn't carrying anything.

  carrying something
  He was carrying something.
  He was carrying something.

  nothing at first   
  He said nothing at first.
  He said nothing at first.

  Nothing happened.     
  Nothing happened.
  No one was at home.
  No one was at home.

3、引导学习:

  Now you're going to hear a  sentence with a missing word. Then you will hear two words.  One of them is the missing word,  and the other word is incorrect. Repeat the sentence, putting in  the missing word. For example,  you hear. . .   

  I saw . . . enter the building.    Someone. . . anyone.  And you say . . . I saw someone enter the building.    Or you hear. . .  He was carrying . . . in his hands.  Anything . . . something.  And you say . . .  He was carrying something in his hands.  All right. Let's begin.

  I saw . . . enter the building.  Someone. . . anyone.  I saw someone enter the building.
  He was carrying . . . in his hands.    Anything. . . something.  He was carrying something in his
  hands.       
  There was . . . in the hall.  Anyone. . . no one.  There was no one in the hall.
    I have. . . to say. . .  Something . . . anything.    I have something to say . . .

四、场景学习:

1、引导语;

  Now listen to part of the  conversation between Chris and  Jake, after Detective Modine  leaves the room. Notice the use of the  expression be supposed to  in the past tense.

2、情景:

    Hi. What happened to you?    You weren't supposed to see  me like this. You were supposed to be here an hour ago.  I had to meet with Steven.  I'm sorry.  This isn't what was supposed to happen.    What was supposed to  happen?  You were supposed to come  in and I was supposed to look  beautiful. I was supposed to  look calm and cool. You  were supposed to forget all  about the disagreement we had. You were supposed to fall madly in love with me.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  to see me like this
  you weren't supposed to
  You weren't supposed to see me like this.   
  You werent supposed to see me  like this.   

    to be here an hour ago
    you were supposed to
    You were supposed to be here an  hour ago.   
    You were supposed to be here an hour ago.   

    what was supposed to happen
    this isn't what   
    This isn't what was supposed to happen.   
    This isn't what was supposed to  happen.   

  to fall madly in love with me
  you were supposed to
  You were supposed to fall madly  in love with me.   
  You were supposed to fall madly  in love with me.   

4、引导学习:

  Now you're going to hear a  sentence in the past tense. Using  that sentence and the expression be supposed to, make a new  sentence saying that the opposite was expected. For example, you  hear.. .   

    You saw me like this.  And you say. . .  You weren't supposed to see me  like this.  Or you hear. . . Jake didn't fall madly in love  with Chris.  And you say. . .  Jake was supposed to fall madly  in love with Chris. OK? Let's begin.   

5、练习:

  You saw me like this.    You weren't supposed to see me  like this.   
  Jake didn't fall madly in love  with Chris.      Jake was supposed to fall madly  in love with Chris.
  This accident happened.  This accident wasn't supposet  to happen.   
  Detective Modine didn't solve the mystery quickly.  Detective Modine was supposed  to solve the mystery quickly.
  Chris didn't look calm and cool.  Chris was supposed to look calm and cool.

五、场景学习:

1、引导语:

  Now listen to a mother who's giving instructions to her children in preparation for a  surprise birthday party planned  for one of the children's cousins.  Notice how she uses the  expression be supposed to in the  present tense.

2、情景:

  Now children, listen carefully.  When your cousin gets here,  remember you're supposed to be  very quiet. He's not supposed to  know we're planning a party for  him. And you're not supposed to  mention the presents hidden in  the closet. He's supposed to  think this is just an ordinary  visit. When I come in with the  cake, everyone is supposed to  shout, "Surprise!" and sing  "Happy Birthday" to him. Is that  clear, children? Children!

3、学习:

    Be supposed to in the present  tense is used to talk about  expected actions that are  customary or advisable. Now  listen and repeat.

  be very quiet
  you're supposed to be
  You're supposed to be very quiet.
  You're supposed to be very quiet.

  to know we're planning a party  for him
  he's not supposed to know
  He's not supposed to know we're  planning a party for him.
  He's not supposed to know we're  planning a party for him.

  to think this is just an ordinary  visit
  he's supposed to think
  He's supposed to think this is just  an ordinary visit.
  He's supposed to think this is just  an ordinary visit.

4、引导学习:

    Now you'll hear a phrase  followed by a subject. Use the  subject, the phrase, and the expression be supposed to in the present tense to talk about a  customary or advisable action. For example, you hear. . .

  Be very quiet. . . you.    And you say . . . You're supposed to be very quiet.  Or you hear. . .  Not know we're planning a party  for him . . . he.  And you say . . .  He's not supposed to know we're  planning a party for him.  OK? Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Be very quiet. . . you.  You're supposed to be very quiet.
  Not know we're planning a party  for him. . . he.  He's not supposed to know we're  planning a party for him.
  Listen to their mother . . .  children.  Children are supposed to listen to their mother.
  Not park in front of a fire hydrant. . . drivers.  Drivers are not supposed to park  in front of a fire hydrant.
  Not tell lies to the police. . .  people being questioned.    People being questioned are not  supposed to tell lies to the  police.

. This is the end of Lesson Eleven.


sunyuting1 2007-11-18 06:21
总结:
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 104 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-11-18 06:26
第十一课总结:


sunyuting1 2007-11-18 06:44
第十一册 复习四

一、基本词组:

1、导游信息:

  A  reporter is interviewing .., one of the ... at ... Listen to what ...
  reporter-Mr.  Green, --guides ---Stamford Museum and Nature  Center.

Could you tell me ...about...history of  .., Mr. Green? 
Certainly.
..was first located in.... But ..., it was  ...that ....
So .., it was moved to .... 
Tell me....  It consisted ....
....became ....
The  second floor became .... 
Was anything done to increase  ...? 
Yes. ...were added ....
But in time,
the patio was ....   
Thank you, Mr. Green.
You've been  very helpful.

the Stamford Museum and Nature Center
The museum collection
the  Stamford Trust Company  building
by 1945
receiving so many visitors
a  new location was needed
that year
a  house in Courtland Park
about the house
of two floors
The  two large rooms downstairt 
an exhibit area
the offices and an apartment for the  director
the activities there
An indoor art gallery and an outdoor patio
to the  house
closed to provide more space for  exhibits

  Imagine that ...and that .... 
Don't write down ..  that he says,
just the most  important details.
There will be  pauses
after each group of words 
for you to write.
you are  the reporter
Mr. Green  is answering your questions

  The museum collection
  was first  located
  in the Stamford Trust  Company building. 

  But by 1945,
  it was receiving
  so  many visitors
  that a new location
  was needed. 

    So that year,
    it was moved to
    a  house in Courtland Park. 

    The house consisted
    of two  floors. 

  The two large rooms downstairs
    became an exhibit area.

    The second  floor
    became the offices
    and an  apartment
    for the director. 

    An indoor art gallery
    and an  outdoor patio
    were added to the house.

    But in time,
    the patio was  closed
    to provide more space
    for  exhibits.

    to answer  these ten questions
    about what ..
    Mr. Green just told you.
    Give short answers.

    In what building
    was the  collection first located? 
      In the Stamford Trust Company  building.

    Why was a new location
    needed  by 1945? 
    Because it was
    receiving so many  visitors.

    In what year
    did  ...move?
  the Stamford  Museum and Nature Center 
  In 1945.

      Where did it
    move to? 
    To a house in Courtland Park.

      How many floors
    did the house consist of? 
    Two floors.

    What did ...become? 
  the two downstairs rooms
  An exhibit area.

    What did...become? 
      the second floor 
    The offices and an apartment
    for the museum director.

    What was added
    to the house? 
    An indoor art gallery
    and an  outdoor patio.

    Why was....closed? 
    the patio
  To provide more space for exhibits.

    What is the name
  of the museum  guide
    who was talking to you?
    Mr. Green.

2、nouns and verbs,
  cancel and  cancellation,
  sentence putting in  the correct form of the verb:


    Now you're going to practice  using words
        that have two forms,
        one for nouns and one for verbs:
        for example,
        cancel and  cancellation.
      Now you tell me
      which word is a noun,
      cancel or  cancellation?
      Right. Cancellation is  a noun.
      And what's the word  cancel?
    Yes. Cancel is a verb.
      Now you're going to
      hear two  forms of a word:
      a noun form and  a verb form.
      Then you'll hear a  sentence
        with a missing word.
      Repeat the sentence
        putting in  the correct form
        of the verb.
        For  example, you hear. . .

  Cancel . . . cancellation. 
      Because I got sick,
      I had to . . .  my trip. 
      Because I got sick,
      I had to  cancel my trip. 
   
      Confirm. . . confirmation. 
      He received a written. . .
      of his  reservation. 
      He received a written 
      confirmation of his reservation.
      All right, let's begin.

    Cancel . . . cancellation. 
        Because I got sick, I had to . . .  my trip. 
      Because I got sick, I had to  (  cancel  )  my trip.

      Confirm. . . confirmation. 
      He received a written. . . of his reservation. 
      He received a written  (  confirmation  ) of his reservation.

      Arrange. . . arrangement.
        I have to . . . an appointment with my dentist. 
      I have to( arrange )an  appointment with my dentist.

    Confirm. . . confirmation.
    Don't forget to. . . your airline  reservation. 
    Don't forget to (confirm )your  airline reservation.

  Cancel. . . cancellation. 
  Because there was a . . . , I  bought a ticket at the last  minute. 
    Because there was a (cancellation),  I bought a ticket at the last  minute.

  Arrange. . . arrangement. 
    We made an . . . to meet at  10:00 AM. 
    We made an (arrangement) to  meet at 10:00 AM.

 
二、基本句子:

1、导游信息问答:

  Could you tell me a little bit about the more recent history of  the Stamford Museum and Nature Center, Mr. Green?  Certainly. The museum  collection was first located in the  Stamford Trust Company  building. But by 1945, it was  receiving so many visitors that a  new location was needed. So  that year, it was moved to a  house in Courtland Park.    Tell me about the house.  It consisted of two floors. The  two large rooms downstairt  became an exhibit area. The  second floor became the offices  and an apartment for the  director.  Was anything done to increase  the activities there?  Yes. An indoor art gallery and an outdoor patio were added to the  house. But in time, the patio was  closed to provide more space for  exhibits.    Thank you, Mr. Green. You've been  very helpful.

  The museum collection was first  located in the Stamford Trust  Company building. 
    But by 1945, it was receiving so  many visitors that a new location  was needed. 
    So that year, it was moved to a  house in Courtland Park. 
    The house consisted of two  floors. 
  The two large rooms downstairs  became an exhibit area.
    The second  floor became the offices and an  apartment for the director. 
    An indoor art gallery and an  outdoor patio were added to the house.
    But in time, the patio was  closed to provide more space for  exhibits.


    In what building was the  collection first located?  In the Stamford Trust Company  building.
    Why was a new location needed  by 1945?  Because it was receiving so many  visitors.
    In what year did the Stamford  Museum and Nature Center  move?  In 1945.
    Where did it move to?    To a house in Courtland Park.
    How many floors did the house consist of?    Two floors.
    What did the two downstairs rooms become?  An exhibit area.
    What did the second floor  become?  The offices and an apartment for the museum director.
    What was added to the house?  An indoor art gallery and an  outdoor patio.
    Why was the patio closed?  To provide more space for exhibits.
    What is the name of the museum  guide who was talking to you?  Mr. Green.

2、nouns and verbs,cancel and  cancellation,sentence putting in  the correct form of the verb


Cancel . . . cancellation. 
Because I got sick, I had to . . .  my trip. 
Because I got sick, I had to  cancel my trip.

  Confirm. . . confirmation. 
He received a written. . . of his  reservation. 
He received a written  confirmation of his reservation. 

    Cancel . . . cancellation.  Because I got sick, I had to . . .  my trip.  Because I got sick, I had to cancel my trip.
  Confirm. . . confirmation.  He received a written. . . of his reservation.  He received a written confirmation of his reservation.
  Arrange. . . arrangement.    I have to . . . an appointment with my dentist.  I have to arrange an  appointment with my dentist.
  Confirm. . . confirmation.  Don't forget to. . . your airline  reservation.  Don't forget to confirm your  airline reservation.
  Cancel. . . cancellation.  Because there was a . . . , I  bought a ticket at the last  minute.  Because there was a cancellation,  I bought a ticket at the last  minute.
  Arrange. . . arrangement.  We made an . . . to meet at  10:00 AM.    We made an arrangement to  meet at 10:00 AM.


三、场景学习:

1、引导学习:

  Welcome to Review Four. For  this lesson, You'll need a pencil  and a piece of paper.  Listen to this conversation. A  reporter is interviewing Mr.  Green, one of the guides at the  Stamford Museum and Nature  Center. Listen to what they say.

2、情景:

  Could you tell me a little bit about the more recent history of  the Stamford Museum and Nature Center, Mr. Green?  Certainly. The museum  collection was first located in the  Stamford Trust Company  building. But by 1945, it was  receiving so many visitors that a  new location was needed. So  that year, it was moved to a  house in Courtland Park.    Tell me about the house.  It consisted of two floors. The  two large rooms downstairt  became an exhibit area. The  second floor became the offices  and an apartment for the  director.  Was anything done to increase  the activities there?  Yes. An indoor art gallery and an outdoor patio were added to the  house. But in time, the patio was  closed to provide more space for  exhibits.    Thank you, Mr. Green. You've been  very helpful.

3、引导学习:

  Now take your pencil and a piece  of paper. Imagine that you are  the reporter and that Mr. Green  is answering your questions.  Don't write down everything  that he says, just the most  important details. There will be  pauses after each group of words  for you to write. Ready? Let's  begin.

4、慢放:

    The museum collection was first  located in the Stamford Trust  Company building. 

    But by 1945, it was receiving so  many visitors that a new location  was needed. 

    So that year, it was moved to a  house in Courtland Park. 

    The house consisted of two  floors. 

  The two large rooms downstairs  became an exhibit area.

    The second  floor became the offices and an  apartment for the director. 

    An indoor art gallery and an  outdoor patio were added to the house.

    But in time, the patio was  closed to provide more space for  exhibits.

5、练习:回答问题

    Now use your paper to answer  these ten questions about what Mr. Green just told you. Give  short answers.

  Question One.  In what building was the  collection first located?  In the Stamford Trust Company  building.
  Question Two.  Why was a new location needed  by 1945?  Because it was receiving so many  visitors.
    Question Three.  In what year did the Stamford  Museum and Nature Center  move?  In 1945.
    Question Four.  Where did it move to?    To a house in Courtland Park.
  Question Five.  How many floors did the house consist of?    Two floors.
  Question Six.    What did the two downstairs rooms become?  An exhibit area.
  Question Seven.  What did the second floor  become?  The offices and an apartment for the museum director.
  Question Eight.    What was added to the house?  An indoor art gallery and an  outdoor patio.
  Question Nine.  Why was the patio closed?  To provide more space for exhibits.
  Question Ten.  What is the name of the museum  guide who was talking to you?  Mr. Green.

四、场景学习:
nouns and verbs,cancel and  cancellation,sentence putting in  the correct form of the verb

1、引导语:

    Now you're going to practice  using words that have two forms,  one for nouns and one for verbs:  for example, cancel and  cancellation. Now you tell me  which word is a noun, cancel or  cancellation? Right. Cancellation is  a noun. And what's the word  cancel? Yes. Cancel is a verb.  Now you're going to hear two  forms of a word: a noun form and  a verb form. Then you'll hear a  sentence with a missing word.  Repeat the sentence putting in  the correct form of the verb. For  example, you hear. . .

2、引导学习:

  Cancel . . . cancellation.  Because I got sick, I had to . . .  my trip.  And you say. . .  Because I got sick, I had to  cancel my trip.  Or you hear. . .  Confirm. . . confirmation.  He received a written. . . of his  reservation.  And you say . . .  He received a written  confirmation of his reservation.  All right, let's begin.

3、练习:

    Cancel . . . cancellation.  Because I got sick, I had to . . .  my trip.  Because I got sick, I had to cancel my trip.
  Confirm. . . confirmation.  He received a written. . . of his reservation.  He received a written confirmation of his reservation.
  Arrange. . . arrangement.    I have to . . . an appointment with my dentist.  I have to arrange an  appointment with my dentist.
  Confirm. . . confirmation.  Don't forget to. . . your airline  reservation.  Don't forget to confirm your  airline reservation.
  Cancel. . . cancellation.  Because there was a . . . , I  bought a ticket at the last  minute.  Because there was a cancellation,  I bought a ticket at the last  minute.
  Arrange. . . arrangement.  We made an . . . to meet at  10:00 AM.    We made an arrangement to  meet at 10:00 AM.

    This is the end of Review Four.


sunyuting1 2007-11-18 07:12
 
第十一册 第十二课

一、基本词组:

1、  be “supposed to ”in the present  tense:

    He has just ...
    received a  ticket for parking longer
      than the legal time limit.
      Notice the use of
      be supposed to in the present  tense.

    I've never gotten ...
      a  parking ticket. 
      You're supposed to
      put  money in the parking meter. 
      I did. It was fast. 
      Why didn't you...
      park in the  garage under the station?
    You're supposed to
    have a  permit. . .
    I don't understand.
    What am I ...
    supposed to do with this?   
    You're the law officer. . .
    You're supposed to
      send  sixteen dollars
    to the address 
    on the ticket. 
    I won't pay it.

    ...to put money in the parking meter
      you're supposed to....
 
  ... to have a permit
    you're supposed to...
   
  ... to do with this
    what am I supposed to....?
 
  ... to send sixteen dollars
      to the address on the ticket
    you're supposed to....
 
  Now you're going to hear
    a  sentence followed by a phrase. 
    Put the phrase
  into the sentence
    to make a new sentence.

  You're supposed to
  have a permit.
  Put money in the parking meter.
You're supposed to
  put money in  the parking meter. 

    Everyone. 
  Everyone is supposed to
  put  money in the parking meter. 

  You're supposed to have a permit.

    Put money in the parking meter.
  You're supposed to
  put money in  the parking meter.

  Everyone.   
  Everyone is supposed to
  put  money in the parking meter.

    People. 
  People are supposed to
  put money in the parking meter.

  Pay their parking tickets. 
  People are supposed to
  pay their  parking tickets.

    Send money to the address on  the ticket.
    People are supposed to
  send  money to the address on the  ticket.

  Not supposed to
  break the law.
  People are not supposed to
  break the law.

2、 “article the ”and“  article a.”:


Now listen to this conversation
  between a husband and wife.
  Notice how they use
  the article the
  and the article a.
  Let's listen.

  Whew! The sun is so hot today,
  I think I'll ...
  stay in “the” house.
  You're right.
  It's not just...
“  the ”air  “the” ground is hot too.
  And“  the” clouds in“ the” sky
  don't really  protect us
  from “the ”heat.
I wish we could...
  go to“ the” park
  for“ a ”picnic.
We haven't taken...
  “ a” walk there
in “a l”ong time.
  I'd  like to see...
“ the” lake
and “the ”flowers too.
But we have ...
  so much work to do right here.
  We have to ...
  fix "the " front door.
There's a problem  with....
"the" lock
that we should take care of.
OK, OK. I realize it's not
" a "good  idea
  to go to "the" park today.
  All  I said was,
  "I wish we could go."


  the sun is so hot today
  I think I'll ...
  stay in the house
  The sun is ..., I think  I'll ....
 
  The ground is hot too.
  don't protect us from the heat
    the clouds in the sky
  The clouds in ..don't  ....
 
  go to the park for a picnic
  I wish we could
  I wish we could go to....

  a walk there in a long time
  we haven't taken
  We haven't taken a....

  Now you're going to
  hear several  sentences.
  In each sentence, 
  there is one or more than
    one  article missing.
  Repeat the  sentence,
    putting in the missing  article or articles.
  For example  you  hear . . .

  Sun is so hot today,
  I think I'll stay in house. 
  The sun is so ...,    I think I'll stay ....

  I wish we could
  go to park for picnic.
  I wish we could go to ....   

  Sun so hot today,
  I think I'll  stay in house.

    The sun is so hot today,
  I think I'll stay in the house.

    I wish we could
    go to park for  picnic.
  I wish we could
  go to “the” park  for a picnic.

    Clouds in sky
  don't protect us from heat.
  The clouds in“ the” sky
don't  protect us from“ the” heat.

  We haven't taken walk
  in park  for long time.
  We haven't taken “a ”walk
  in“ the”  park for a long time.

  We have to
  fix front door.
  We have to
fix “the” front door.

  There's problem
with lock.
  There's a problem
  with “the” lock.

3、压码听懂信息判断正误:

      let's  listen to...
      Mike as he tells us
      what he was doing
      on  the night
      that  someone tried
      to sabotage the station.

      Jake asked me ...
      to get a map for  him
      in the glove compartment  of his car.
      He told me....
      to look  at the map
      and find the  building site
      for the  apartments
      at the Nature  Center.
        I also had to....
      get the  camera.
      It was ...
      in the trunk of  my car.
      My car was ...
      parked in  the garage,
      so I didn't ...
      return  for half an hour.
      I got back ...
      just in time to see Rita's tape.

    Now take your ....
    You'll hear Mike tell us  again
    what he was doing
    that  night.
    This time you take notes  on
    what he says.
    There will be 
    pauses after each group of words
      for you to write.
    Don't write  down every word,
    just the  important details.
    Ready? Let's  begin.

  Jake asked me....
    to get a map for  him
    in the glove compartment of his car.

    He told me ....
    to look at the map
  and find the building site
    for the apartments
    at the Nature Center. 

    I also had to...
    get my camera.

    It was ...
    in the trunk of my car.

    My car was...
    parked in the  garage,

  so I didn't ...
  return for  half an hour. 

    I got back just....
    in time to see  Rita's tape.

    Now use your paper
    to answer 
    the following true-or-false  statements.
    If the answer is true, 
    just say "True."
    But if the answer  is false,
    say "False"
    and give the  correct answer.
    For example, you hear.. .

  Jake asked Mike...
      ...to get a map for him
      in the trunk of his car.
      False.
    He asked Mike...
    ...to get a map for him
    in the glove  compartment of his car.
 
      He told Mike ...
    ...to look at the map
    and find the building site
      for the apartments
    at the Nature  Center.
    True.

  Question  :
  Jake asked Mike
  to get a map for  him
    in the trunk of his car. 
    False.
    He asked Mike ...
  ...to get a  map for him
    in the glove compartment of his car.
   
  He told Mike...
.... to look at the map
    and find the building site
    for the apartments
  at the Nature  Center. 
  True.

  Mike also had to...
... get his tape recorder. 
  False.
  He also had to...
.... get his camera.

    Mike's camera was....
.... in the glove compartment of the car. 
  False.
  It was...
.... in the trunk of the car.

  The car was ...
....parked in the garage.
  True.

  Mike didn't return ...
...for an hour. 
  False.
  He didn't return ...
  for half  an hour.

  Mike got back just in time ....
  ....to  hear Rita's telephone conversation.
    False.
  He got back just in time ...
  ...to see  Rita's tape.

Well, that's enough for now.
You've finished this lesson
and this book.


二、基本句子:

  1、be supposed to in the present  tense

  You're supposed to put money in the  parking meter.
    You're supposed to have a  permit.
    What am I supposed to do with  this?
    You're supposed to send sixteen dollars to the address on the  ticket.


  You're supposed to have a permit.
  Put money in the parking meter.
  You're supposed to put money in  the parking meter. 

  Everyone. 
  Everyone is supposed to put  money in the parking meter. 

You're supposed to have a permit.

    Put money in the parking meter.  You're supposed to put money in  the parking meter.
  Everyone.    Everyone is supposed to put  money in the parking meter.
    People.  People are supposed to put money in the parking meter.
  Pay their parking tickets.    People are supposed to pay their  parking tickets.
    Send money to the address on  the ticket.  People are supposed to send  money to the address on the  ticket.
  Not supposed to break the law.  People are not supposed to break the law.


2、artcle “the”and “ a”:

      The sun is so hot today, I think  I'll stay in the house.
      The clouds in the sky don't  protect us from the heat.
      I wish we could go to the park  for a picnic.
      We haven't taken a walk there  in a long time.

    Sun is so hot today, I think I'll stay in house. 
      The sun is so hot today,    I think I'll stay in the house.

      I wish we could go to park for picnic. 
    I wish we could go to the park for a picnic. 

    Sun so hot today, I think I'll  stay in house.
    The sun is so hot today, I think I'll stay in the house.
    I wish we could go to park for  picnic.  I wish we could go to the park  for a picnic.
    Clouds in sky don't protect us from heat.  The clouds in the sky don't  protect us from the heat.
  We haven't taken walk in park  for long time.  We haven't taken a walk in the  park for a long time.
    We have to fix front door. We have to fix the front door.
  There's problem with lock. There's a problem with the lock.

3、判断信息正误:

  Jake asked me to get a map for  him in the glove compartment  of his car.
    He told me to look  at the map
    and find the  building site for the  apartments at the Nature  Center.
    I also had to get the  camera.
    It was in the trunk of  my car.
    My car was parked in  the garage,
    so I didn't return  for half an hour. I got back  just in time to see Rita's tape.

  Jake asked Mike to get a map for him in the trunk of his car.
  False. He asked Mike to get a map for him in the glove  compartment of his car. 

  He told Mike to look at the map and find the building site for the apartments at the Nature Center.  True.

  Question :
  Jake asked Mike to get a map for  him in the trunk of his car.  False. He asked Mike to get a  map for him in the glove compartment of his car.
He told Mike to look at the map and find the building site for the apartments at the Nature  Center.  True.
  Mike also had to get his tape  recorder.  False. He also had to get his camera.
  Mike's camera was in the glove  compartment of the car.    False. It was in the trunk of the  car.
  The car was parked in the garage.  True.
  Mike didn't return for an hour.  False. He didn't return for half  an hour.
  Mike got back just in time to  hear Rita's telephone conversation. False. He got back just in time to see  Rita's tape.

Well, that's enough for now. You've finished this lesson and this book.



三、场景学习supposed to in the present  tense:

一、引导语supposed to in the present  tense:

    This is Lesson Twelve. For this lesson, you'll need a pencil and a  piece of paper. Listen to part of a conversation  between Chris and Detective  Modine. He has just received a  ticket for parking longer than the legal time limit. Notice the use of be supposed to in the present  tense.

2、情景:

    I've never gotten a  parking ticket.  You're supposed to put  money in the parking meter.    I did. It was fast.    Why didn't you park in the  garage under the station? You're supposed to have a  permit. . . I don't understand. What am I  supposed to do with this?    You're the law officer. . .  You're supposed to send  sixteen dollars to the address  on the ticket.    I won't pay it.

4、学习

    Now listen and repeat.

  to put money in the parking meter
  you're supposed to
  You're supposed to put money in the parking meter.
  You're supposed to put money in the  parking meter.

    to have a permit
    you're supposed to
    You're supposed to have a permit.
    You're supposed to have a  permit.

    to do with this
    what am I supposed to
    What am I supposed to do with  this?
    What am I supposed to do with  this?

    to send sixteen dollars to the
    address on the ticket
    you're supposed to
    You're supposed to send sixteen  dollars to the address on the  ticket.
    You're supposed to send sixteen dollars to the address on the  ticket.

4、引导学习:sentence followed by a phrase,Put the phrase into the sentence  to make a new sentence。

    Now you're going to hear a  sentence followed by a phrase.  Put the phrase into the sentence  to make a new sentence. For example, you hear. . .

  You're supposed to have a permit. Put money in the parking meter.
  And you say . . . You're supposed to put money in  the parking meter. 
  Then you hear. . .  Everyone. 
  And you say. . .    Everyone is supposed to put  money in the parking meter. 
  All right? Let's begin.

5、练习:

  You're supposed to have a permit.

    Put money in the parking meter.  You're supposed to put money in  the parking meter.
  Everyone.    Everyone is supposed to put  money in the parking meter.
    People.  People are supposed to put money in the parking meter.
  Pay their parking tickets.    People are supposed to pay their  parking tickets.
    Send money to the address on  the ticket.  People are supposed to send  money to the address on the  ticket.
  Not supposed to break the law.  People are not supposed to break the law.

四、场景学习use the article the and the article a.:

1、引导语:

  Now listen to this conversation  between a husband and wife.  Notice how they use the article the and the article a. Let's listen.

2、情景:

  Whew! The sun is so hot today,  I think I'll stay in the house.  You're right. It's not just the air  the ground is hot too. And  the clouds in the sky don't really  protect us from the heat.  I wish we could go to the park for a picnic. We haven't taken a walk there in a long time. I'd  like to see the lake and the flowers too.  But we have so much work to do right here. We have to fix the  front door. There's a problem  with the lock that we should take care of.  OK, OK. I realize it's not a good  idea to go to the park today. All  I said was, "I wish we could go."

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  the sun is so hot today
  I think I'll stay in the house
  The sun is so hot today, I think  I'll stay in the house.
  The sun is so hot today, I think  I'll stay in the house.

  The ground is hot too.
  The ground is hot too.
  don't protect us from the heat
    the clouds in the sky
  The clouds in the sky don't  protect us from the heat.
  The clouds in the sky don't  protect us from the heat.

  go to the park for a picnic
  I wish we could
  I wish we could go to the park  for a picnic.
  I wish we could go to the park  for a picnic.

  a walk there in a long time
  we haven't taken
  We haven't taken a walk there  in a long time.
  We haven't taken a walk there  in a long time.

4、引导学习:

    Now you're going to hear several  sentences. In each sentence,  there is one or more than one  article missing. Repeat the  sentence, putting in the missing  article or articles. For example  you  hear . . .

  Sun is so hot today, I think I'll stay in house.  And you say. . .  The sun is so hot today,    I think I'll stay in the house. Or you hear. . .  I wish we could go to park for picnic.  And you say. . .  I wish we could go to the park for a picnic.    All right. Let's begin.

5、练习:

    Sun so hot today, I think I'll  stay in house.
    The sun is so hot today, I think I'll stay in the house.
    I wish we could go to park for  picnic.  I wish we could go to the park  for a picnic.
    Clouds in sky don't protect us from heat.  The clouds in the sky don't  protect us from the heat.
  We haven't taken walk in park  for long time.  We haven't taken a walk in the  park for a long time.
  We have to fix front door. We have to fix the front door.
  There's problem with lock. There's a problem with the lock.

五、场景学习--回答听懂信息判断正误:

1、引导语:

  Now to end this lesson, let's  listen to Mike as he tells us what  he was doing on  the night that  someone tried to sabotage the station.

2、情景:

    Jake asked me to get a map for  him in the glove compartment  of his car.
    He told me to look  at the map
    and find the  building site for the  apartments at the Nature  Center.
    I also had to get the  camera.
    It was in the trunk of  my car.
    My car was parked in  the garage,
    so I didn't return  for half an hour. I got back  just in time to see Rita's tape.

3、引导学习:

  Now take your pencil and a piece  of paper. You'll hear Mike tell us  again what he was doing that  night. This time you take notes  on what he says. There will be  pauses after each group of words  for you to write. Don't write  down every word, just the  important details. Ready? Let's  begin.

4、慢放情景:

    Jake asked me to get a map for  him in the glove compartment of his car.

    He told me to look at the map

  and find the building site for the apartments at the Nature Center. 

    I also had to get my camera.

    It was in the trunk of my car.

    My car was parked in the  garage,

  so I didn't return for  half an hour. 

    I got back just in time to see  Rita's tape.


5、引导语:

  Now use your paper to answer  the following true-or-false  statements. If the answer is true,  just say "True." But if the answer  is false, say "False" and give the  correct answer. For example, you hear.. .

6、引导学习:

  Jake asked Mike to get a map for him in the trunk of his car. And you say. . . False. He asked Mike to get a map for him in the glove  compartment of his car.    Or you hear. . .    He told Mike to look at the map and find the building site for the apartments at the Nature  Center.  And you say. . . True. Ready? Let's begin.

7、练习:回答问题,并改错

  Question  One.  Jake asked Mike to get a map for  him in the trunk of his car.  False. He asked Mike to get a  map for him in the glove  compartment of his car.
    Question Two.  He told Mike to look at the map and find the building site for the apartments at the Nature  Center.  True.
  Question Three.  Mike also had to get his tape  recorder.  False. He also had to get his camera.
  Question Four.  Mike's camera was in the glove  compartment of the car.    False. It was in the trunk of the  car.
  Question Five.  The car was parked in the garage.  True.
  Question Six.  Mike didn't return for an hour.  False. He didn't return for half  an hour.
  Question Seven.  Mike got back just in time to  hear Rita's telephone conversation. False. He got back just in time to see  Rita's tape.

Well, that's enough for now. You've finished this lesson and this book.

This is the end of Lesson Twelve.
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 105 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-10-18 16:04
第十册第一课

一、基本词组:

most of it   
  half of it   
all of it   
  some of it   
  part of it   

二、基本句子:

          I liked most of it.
        More than half of it was excellent.   
        I didn't enjoy all of it.
        Some of it was too long and boring.
        Part of it seemed slow and uninteresting. 
        My mother thought all of it was  wonderful. 
        My father didn't like any of it.

        Did you eat that pie?  Ten percent.      I eat  some of it.
        Did you enjoy that mystery  story?      Seventy-five percent.  I enjoyed most of it.
        Did you watch that TV  program last night?    Zero percent.  I didn't watch any of it.
        Did you do your homework?  Ten percent.        I did some of it.
        Did you invite your friends to your graduation?  A hundred percent.  I invited all of them.

      Free time to do what I like.  I want more free time to do  what I like.
      Crime where I live.  I want less crime where I live.
      Financial problems in my life.  I want fewer financial problems  in my life.


三、场景学习qualifiers  expressions like all  of, most of, half of, and so on:

1、引导语:

  Welcome to Book Ten. This is  Lesson One. You're going to  hear a conversation between
  two friends. They're talking  about a movie that they both  watched on TV last night. As  you listen to them, notice the  qualifiers they use. Remember,  qualifiers are expressions like all  of, most of, half of, and so on.  Ready? Listen.   

2、情景

  So did you enjoy that movie  last night?      Well, I liked most of it. More  than half of it was excellent, I  thought. But I didn't enjoy all  of it. Some of it was too long  and boring. How about you?  What did you think about it?  I agree with you. Most of the  movie was good, but part of it  seemed slow and uninteresting.  Oh, did I tell you? My parents  watched it too.        What did they think?  As usual, they couldn't agree.  My mother thought all of it was  wonderful. My father didn't like  any of it.   

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.
  most of it   
  I liked most of it.
  I liked most of it.
  half of it   
  More than half of it was excellent.   
  More than half of it was  excellent.   
  all of it   
  I didn't enjoy all of it.
  I didn't enjoy all of it.

  some of it   
  Some of it was too long and boring.   
  Some of it was too long and boring.   
  part of it   
  Part of it seemed slow and uninteresting.   
  Part of it seemed slow and  uninteresting.   

  all of it   
  My mother thought all of it was  wonderful.   
  My mother thought all of it was  wonderful.   

  any of it   
  My father didn't like any of it.
  My father didn't like any of it.

四、场景学习qualifier for  percent :

1、引导语:

        As you know, the qualifier for a  hundred percent of something  is all of it. For zero percent of  something, the qualifier is not  any of it. Fifty percent is half of  it. More than fifty percent is
  most of it, and less than fifty percent is some of it or part of it.
  Now, you're going to hear a  question followed by a number  with percents. Use the number  to decide what answer to give  with a qualifier.

  2、学习

For example, I  say, "Did you like that movie?"  Then you hear. . .  Fifty percent.      And you say . . .  I liked half of it.  Or I say, "Did you eat that pie?" Then you hear. . .  Ten percent.      And you say. . .  I ate some of it.  Or you could also say. . .  I eat part of it.  Both are correct. All ready?  Let's begin. Did you like that  movie?   

3、练习

  Fifty percent.  I liked half of it. 
  Did you eat that pie?  Ten percent.      I ate some of it.
  Did you enjoy that mystery  story?      Seventy-five percent.  I enjoyed most of it.
  Did you watch that TV  program last night?    Zero percent.  I didn't watch any of it.
  Did you do your homework?  Ten percent.        I did some of it.
  Did you invite your friends to your graduation?  A hundred percent.  I invited all of them.

五、场景学习 want more of 、want less of 、  fewer 应用:

1、引导语:

  Now let's listen to an interview. A magazine reporter is interviewing a married couple  to find out what they want  more of and what they want  less of in their lives. Let's  listen.   

2、情景:

Hello there. Uh . . . excuse me, sir. .. ma'am. I'm doing  an interview for a magazine article on people's lives. I'm  trying to find out what people  want more of and what they  want less of in their daily lives.  How about you, sir?
Let's see. . . What do I want more of? Well, I want more  money, of course. And more  free time to play golf. Yes. And  I want more parking places  when I drive to work and less  trouble with my boss. Oh,  yeah, I definitely want more  sleep at home and less pressure  to help with the housework. I guess that's about all. And what about you, ma'am?
Well, what I want is . . . more kitchen appliances to make my  life a little easier. And fewer  problems about when I can drive his sports car. I'd like  more friends to go to the  movies with. And I'd really like  fewer arguments about how  much money we spend. And  maybe a little more love in my  life.   
What was the last thing you said?   
  We'll discuss that when we get  home, dear.   
Well, thank you for the  interview . . . and for some very interesting answers.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  more money 
  I want more  money.   

  more free time
  I want more free time.

  more sleep 
  I need more sleep.

  more help   
  I need more help.

  less pressure
  I'd like less pressure.

  less trouble   
  I'd like less trouble.

  less crime 
I want less crime.

  less work 
I want less work.

  fewer financial problems
  I'd like fewer financial  problems.   

  fewer arguments
  I'd like fewer arguments.

  troubles   
  I want fewer troubles.

  fewer accidents
  I want fewer accidents.

六、场景学习 more of, less of, or fewer of. with either countable or  uncountable nouns.

1、引导语:

Remember that we use more of  with either countable or  uncountable nouns. We use less  of with uncountable nouns, like  less crime and less work, and  fewer of with countable nouns,  like fewer problems and fewer  arguments. Now you're going to  hear some things that you  might like more of, less of, or fewer of. Decide which form is  most appropriate and use that  form in a sentence that begins  with I want. For example, you  hear.. .

2、学习:

  Free time to do what I like.  And you say . . .  I want more free time to do  what I like.  You hear. . .  Crime where I live.  And you say . . . I want less crime where I live.  Ready? Let's begin.

3、练习:

    Free time to do what I like.  I want more free time to do  what I like.
    Crime where I live.  I want less crime where I live.
    Time for my favorite sports.  I want more time for my  favorite sports.
    Financial problems in my life.  I want fewer financial problems  in my life.
    Trouble with my car.    I want less trouble with my car.
    Pressure at work.  I want less pressure at work.
    Arguments with my boss.  I want fewer arguments with my  boss.
    Love in my life.  I want more love in my life.

4、结束语:

  Well, most of us want more  love in our lives, don't we?  And less trouble. And fewer  problems. But I think that's  more than enough work for  now.

  This is the end of Lesson One.


sunyuting1 2007-10-19 07:46
第十册第二课

一、基本词组:

too 、enough用法:

too old or too weak.
strong enough or old enough
enough  strength and enough time

too weak\not strong enough 

enough  strength \strong enough

beautiful singer\ sing beautifully.

二、基本句子:

You think I'm too old to carry anything heavy.
  You think I'm too weak to do  anything.
  You're not strong enough to carry those heavy bags.
    I still have enough strength to do my own shopping.

    I'm too weak to stand up.  That's right. You aren't strong  enough to stand up.
    I'm not old enough to retire.    That's right. You're too young to  retire.

  She doesn't have enough  strength to carry those bags.  She isn't strong enough to carry  those bags.

 He's a superb singer. He sings superbly.

You're a beautiful singer.  You sing beautifully.

三、场景学习too and enough的用法:

use the  form too with an adjective,enough after an adjective, before a noun like enough  strength

1、引导语:

  Welcome to Lesson Two. You're  going to hear a conversation  between a mother and her son.  They're talking about what the mother can or can't do because  of her age, and if she needs help  or not. Notice when they use the  form too with an adjective, like  too old or too weak. Or they may  use enough after an adjective, like strong enough or old enough or  before a noun like enough  strength and enough time. Now  listen.   

2、情景:

  Here, Mom, let me help you  with those shopping bags.    I know, I know. You think I'm  too old to carry anything heavy.  You think I'm too weak to do  anything.      No, that's not what I mean. But  you aren't strong enough to carry  those heavy bags by yourself.  I still have enough strength to do  my own shopping. Besides, I  know you're too busy to help an  old lady like me.    That's not true, Mom. I always  have enough time to help you.  And I don't think you're too old  to do anything.  Well, I suppose I am old enough  to know when I've made a  mistake. These bags are too  heavy. Maybe I will let you carry  them for me!      Gee, thanks, Mom.  But don't drop anything!

3、学习

    Now listen and repeat.

    too old to carry anything heavy
  You think I'm too old to carry
  anything heavy.
  You think I'm too old to carry anything heavy.

  too weak to do anything
  You think I'm too weak to do anything.   
  You think I'm too weak to do  anything.   

  not strong enough
  you're not strong enough to carry
  You're not strong enough to
  carry those heavy bags.
  You're not strong enough to carry those heavy bags.

    enough strength
  I still have enough strength
  I still have enough strength to do
  my own shopping.
  I still have enough strength to do my own shopping.

四、场景学习too and enough反义词之间的变换 

either too  adjective too weak与not adjective plus  enough, like not strong enough之间的变换 . 

1、引导语:

  Now you're going to hear a  statement that uses either too  and an adjective, like too weak,  or not and an adjective plus  enough, like not strong enough.  After you hear the statement,  agree with it, using the other  form and a different adjective.  For example, you hear. . .

2、学习

  I'm too weak to stand up.    And you say. . .    That's right. You aren't strong enough to stand up.  Or you hear. . .  I'm not old enough to retire.  And you say. . .  That's right. You're too young to  retire.  OK? Let's begin.

3、练习

  I'm too weak to stand up.  That's right. You aren't strong  enough to stand up.
    I'm not old enough to retire.    That's right. You're too young to  retire.
I'm not rich enough to buy ajet  plane.  That's right. You're too poor to  buy a jet plane.
  I'm too short to reach the top  shelf.  That's right. You aren't tall enough to reach the top shelf.
  I'm not thin enough to wear that belt.  That's right. You're too fat to  wear that belt.
  I'm not young enough to travel  for half price.  That's right. You're too old to  travel for half price.

六、场景学习enough相同表达式的变换 

enough  noun like enough  strength,change it to  adjective  enough like strong  enough

1、引导语:

  Now let's make a change. When  you hear a statement using  enough and a noun, like enough  strength, change it to an  equivalent expression using an  adjective and enough, like strong  enough. For example you  hear.. .

2、学习:

  She doesn't have enough strength to carry those bags.  And you say. . .    She isn't strong enough to carry  those bags.  Or you hear. . .  He doesn't have enough money  to buy a new car.  And you say . . .  He isn't rich enough to buy a  new car.  All ready? Let's begin.

3、练习

    She doesn't have enough  strength to carry those bags.  She isn't strong enough to carry  those bags.
    He doesn't have enough money to buy a new car.  He isn't rich enough to buy a new car.
    He doesn't have enough  intelligence to pass that test.  He isn't intelligent enough to  pass that test.
  They don't have enough cleverness to understand the  instructions.  They aren't clever enough to  understand the instructions.
  This orange juice doesn't have  enough sweetness to drink.  This orange juice isn't sweet  enough to drink.
  This situation doesn't have  enough difficulty to cause a  problem. This situation isn't difficult  enough to cause a problem.

七、场景学习形容词与动词的互换表达:

He's a superb singer. He sings superbly.

1、引导语:

  Now listen to this conversation,  which takes place at an elegant  cocktail party. A famous opera  singer and a famous fashion  designer have just met each  other and greatly admire each  other's work. Notice how they  compliment each other. Let's  listen.

2、情景

  Luciano, I must tell you. I think  you're a superb singer. You  always sing your roles superbly
  well.  My dear Yuko, you are too kind.  I've always thought you were such an elegant fashion designer.  Your designs are so elegantly  made. But of course, since you're  such a graceful woman, it's not  surprising that your clothes are so  gracefully designed.  Really, Luciano, these  compliments are too, too  beautiful. And you say them so  beautifully too.

3、学习

    Now listen and repeat.

  He's a superb singer.
  He sings superbly.
  She designs elegant clothes.
  Her clothes are elegantly  designed.

  She's a graceful woman.
  She does things so gracefully.
  He says beautiful things.
  He says them beautifully.

4、引导语:

  Notice how an adjective like  graceful or beautiful can be  changed to an adverb like  gracefully and beautifully. A few  adjectives, like good or fast, have irregular adverb forms. Good  becomes well and fast stays the same: fast. Now you're going to  hear a sentence that uses an  adjective. Change the sentence  so that the adjective becomes an  adverb. For example, you  hear.. .

5、学习

  You're a beautiful singer.    And you say . . .  You sing beautifully.  Or you hear. . .  She's a graceful swimmer.  And you say. . .  She swims gracefully.  All right. Let's begin.

6、练习

  You're a beautiful singer.  You sing beautifully.
    She's a graceful swimmer. She swims gracefully.
    They speak very good English.  They speak English very well.
    You're a superb dancer.    You dance superbly.
  He's a very fast talker.    He talks very fast.
  They're careful workers.  They work carefully.

八、场景学习动词变形容词词性变化 

1、引导语:

  Now let's do the opposite. You'll  hear a sentence that uses an  adverb. Change the sentence so
  that the adverb becomes an adjective. For example, you  hear.. .

2、学习

You dance elegantly.  And you say . . .  You're an elegant dancer.  Or you hear. . .  She speaks intelligently.    And you say . . .  She's an intelligent speaker.  All right, let's begin.

3、练习

  You dance elegantly.    You're an elegant dancer.
    She speaks intelligently.  She's an intelligent speaker.
  He drives dangerously.  He's a dangerous driver.
  They swim fast.  They're fast swimmers.
  He sings fabulously.  He's a fabulous singer.
  I write well.  I'm a good writer.
  She works carefully.  She's a careful worker.

  This is the end of Lesson Two.


sunyuting1 2007-10-21 05:22
第十册第三课

一、基本词组:

Would you like
  Do you want
  You can have
  How about having

one of my
part of my
a piece of
some of my
half of my

looks,can still do

verbs are be, feel, look, seem, appear, taste,  smell, and sound

looks brautiful.
very well
seem very

  You look
  I feel
  she can still do

  compliment
  Beautiful...brautiful.
  Good。。very well.
  Delicious... smells delicious.
  Happy ... seem very happy.
  Excellent... very excellent.
  Greaceful...very gracefully.
  Good...  tastes good.
    Perfect... perfectly.
    Noce... nicely.

gracefully.
wondfull
lovely
talented
fabulous
excellent

intensifiers:Very.Pretty, fairly

二、基本句子:

Would you like one of my sandwiches?
Do you want part of my orange?
You can have a piece of cake?
How  about having a piece of cake?

I can still do play tennis beautifully。

  Beautiful... your new house looks.    Your new house looks brautiful.

  You dance very gracefully.
    A wonderful voice.  You have a wondfull voice.
    Wonderful tennis player.  You're a wonderful tennis player.

    A wonderful voice.  You have a wondfull voice.
    Lovely eyes.  You have lovely eyes.
    Talented actress.  You're a talented actress.
  Fabulous singer.  You're a fabulous singer.
  Speak excellent English.  You speak excellent English.
    Wonderful tennis player.  You're a wonderful tennis player.

  There are a lot of things I can  still do pretty well.


  I'm a good swimmer.  Very.  I'm a very good swimmer.
  She dances gracefully.  Pretty.  She dances pretty gracefully.
  He's a bad tennis player.    Fairly.  He's a fairly bad tennis player.
   
三、场景学习having lunch  :

telking having lunch  about Would you like, Do you want ,How about having ,You can have    with  one of my sandwiches, part of my orange, a piece of cake,some of potato chips, the centence like  Would you like one of my sandwiches?


1、引导语:

    Welcome to Lesson Three. Listen  to this conversation. Two friends who work in the same office are  having lunch and sharing their  food with each other. Notice how they offer different kinds of food to each other and how they accept or refuse the other's offer.

2、情景 food :

  Say,Fred, I have more food here than I can eat. Would you like one of my sandwiches? Oh, thanks, Molly. I'm not  really very hungry, but I would  like half a andwiches, if you don't  mind. Of course I don't mind. Here you  are. Do you want part of my orange?      Oh, thanks a lot. That's very  kind of you. By the way, would  you like a piece of cake? And how about having some of my  potato chips?
Whoa! Slow down, Fred. You  won't have much of you own  lunch to eat, if you keep offering  it all to me!

3、学习:

    Now listen and repeat.

      Would you like one of my sandwiches?
      Would you like one of my sandwiches?
      Do you want part of my orange?
      Do you want part of my orange?

        Would you like  a piece of cake?
        Would you like a piece of cake?
        How about having some of potato chips?
        How about having some of potato ships?

四、场景学习替换练习having lunch  sentence:

1、引导语:

  Now you're going to hear  a sentence and a few other words. Usd the words to shange the  sentence you just heard. For example, you hear...

    Would you like one of my sandwiges?    Half of my orange.    And you say...  would you like half of my orange?  Then you hear...    Do you want.  And you say...    Do you want half of my orange?  All rightr? Let's begin.

2、替换练习:

      Would you like one of my sandwiches?
    Half of my orange.    Would you like half of my orange?
    Do you want.    Do you want half of my orange?
  Some of my ginger ale.    Do you want some of my ginger ale?
    A piece of cake?  Do you want a piece of cake?
  You can have.      You can have a piece of cake?
    How about having.    How  about having a piece of cake?

五、场景学习discuss how she  looks,what she can still do :

1、引导语:

  Now listen to Mike and Rita as  they discuss Rita's age, how she looks, and what she can still do well. Listem.

2、情景:

    Most people don't retire at  your age. You look great.    I feel great. In fact, I feel marvelous... and still do pretty weell.  I can still do play tennis beautifully.    I've see you. You're a  wounderfoul tennis player.  I'm very good swimmer.I  can ski fairly well too。    And you dance gracefully.    Gracefully? Tha't a word for  an old lady,Mike.      Excuse me. You're a hot dancer.    That's more like it.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

    You look great.
    You look great.
    You look marvelous.
    You look marvelous.

    I feel great.
    I feel great.
    I feel marvelous.
    I feel marvelous.

    You dance gracefully.
      You dance gracefully.
      You're a hot dancer.
      You're a hot dancer.

      I'm a good swimmer.
        I'm a good swimmer.
        I can ski fairly well too.
        I can ski fairly well too.

六、场景学习 changed  either an  adjective or  an adverb:

verbs are be, feel, look, seem, appear, taste,  smell, and sound  followed by an adjective Other verbs,  like play, dance, or ski

1、引导语:

  Notice how there are certain  verbs that are always followed by an adjective. These verbs are be, feel, look, seem, appear, taste,  smell, and sound. Other verbs,  like play, dance, or ski, take an    adjective followd by a  sentence  that needs either an  adjective or  an adverb. Decide if  the adjective should stay  the  same or if it should be changed  to an adverb.  Say the sentence  correctly, using the correct  adjective or adverd form.For  example, you hear...

2、学习:

  Beautiful... your new house looks.  And you say...    Your new house looks beautiful.    Or you hear...  Good... you swim very.    And you say...    You swim very well.  All right? Let's begin.

3、替换练习:

  Beautiful... your new house looks.    Your new house looks brautiful.
  Good... you swim very.    You swim very well.
    Delicious... thia food smells.    This food smells delicious.
    Happy ... they seem very.  They seem very happy.
  Excellent... that skier is really.  That skier is very excellent.
    Greaceful... the dancers move very.    The dancer move very gracefully.
    Good...  your mother's chocolate cake tastes .    Your mother's chocolate cake tastes good.
    Perfect... your shoes match your dress.    Your shoes match your dress perfectly.
      Noce... that hat fits you very.  That hat fits you very nicely.

七、场景学习Change the  compliment:

1、引导语:

  Now, do you remember what a  compliment is? When you tell  people how good they are at  something  or how well they do  something, that's a compliment,    You're going to hear a  compliment, folowed by some  other words, Change the  compliment by putting in the    new words to create a new  comliment. For example, you hear...

2、学习:
  You dance very gracefully.  Hot dancer.    And you say...  You're a hot dancer.  Then you hear...    A  wonderful voice.  And you say... You have a wonderful voice.  Ok? Let's begin.

3、练习:
  You dance very gracefully.
  Hot dancer.
  A wonderful voice.  You have a wondfull voice.
    Lovely eyes.  You have lovely eyes.
    Talented actress.  You're a talented actress.
  Fabulous singer.  You're a fabulous singer.
  Speak excellent English.  You speak excellent English.
    Wonderful tennis player.  You're a wonderful tennis player.

八、场景学习  I can still do :

1、引导语:

  Now, do you remember what Rita said about herself?

2、情景:

  And there are lots of things I  can still do pretty well. I can  still play tennis beautifully . . . I'm a very good swimmer.  I can ski fairly well too.
3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

    I can still do pretty well
  there are a lot of things
  There are a lot of things I can
  still do pretty well.
  There are a lot of things I can
  still do pretty well.

  I'm a very good swimmer.
  I'm a very good swimmer.
  ski fairly well
  I can ski fairly well too.
  I can ski fairly well too.

九、场景学习 intensifiers like  very,pretty,fairly :

1、引导语:

  We use the adverbs very, pretty, and fairly as intensifiers. They  can modify adjectives: for example, very good. I'm a very good skier. Or they can modify adverbs: for example, fairly well,  I can ski fairly well too. Now  you're going to hear a sentence,  followed by an intensifier, either  very, pretty, orfairly. Repeat the  sentence putting the intensifier  in the right place. For example, you hear. . .

2、学习:

  I'm a good swimmer.    Very.  And you say . . .  I'm a very good swimmer.  Or you hear. . .      She dances gracefully.  Pretty.  And you say . . .  She dances pretty gracefully.  All right? Let's begin.

3、练习:

  I'm a good swimmer.  Very.  I'm a very good swimmer.
  She dances gracefully.  Pretty.  She dances pretty gracefully.
  He's a bad tennis player.    Fairly.  He's a fairly bad tennis player.
  She's a hot dancer.    Pretty.      She's a pretty hot dancer.
  I've accomplished my goals well.  Fairly.      I've accomplished my goals fairly well.   
  She's good at scuba diving.    Very.      She's very good at scuba diving.

  This is the end of Lesson Three.


sunyuting1 2007-10-21 17:39
第十册复习一

一、基本词组:

  How many
    Besides
    What kind

    a trip to 
    I'd like to
    I thought
   
      plan to
      should have
      doesn't have to

      What is
      Who will
      What are
      Who will share
        What will
      Which


    How far
    Who are
    How much does it rain
    What is the temperature
    Celsius
      Fahrenheit

二、基本句子:

I'd like to arrange a trip to Europe  for myself and my family.
  How many people are there in your family?
  Besides myself, there are my  wife, my two sons, and my infant  daughter.
What kind of accommodations  did you have in mind?
I thought my wife and I and the  baby could share a double.
With or without a bathroom?
The double should have a bath. The twin doesn't have to have one.

You'll be traveling with your wife,  your two sons,  and your infant daughter.
    You plan to spend three nights in London,  three nights in Paris, and four nights in Rome.
You, your wife, and the baby will share a double, and your sons can share a twin.
The double should have a bath, but the twin doesn't have to  have one.

What is the customer's name?  Richard Brodsky.
  Who will he be traveling with?  His wife, his two sons, and his  infant daughter.
What are the three cities they  plan to visit?  London, Paris, and Rome. What is the total number of  nights they plan to spend in    Europe?  Ten nights.
  Which city will they spend the  most nights in?    Rome.   
  Who will share the double with  Mr. Brodsky?    His wife and their baby.
What will the sons share? A twin.   
Which room should have a bath,  the twin or the double?  The double. 

How far is Grand Turk Island  from Miami?  Five hundred and seventy-five miles.
What two words are used to  describe the climate and the  beaches?  Wonderful and fabulous.
How many inhabitants are there  on the island?  About three thousand.
Who are most of the inhabitants?  Descendants of African slaves.
How much does it rain on Grand Turk Island?  Very little.
What is the temperature range in degrees Celsius?  Between twenty-four and thirty  degrees.
What is the temperature range in  degrees Fahrenheit?  Between seventy-five and eighty- six degrees.


三、旅行社场景学习:

1、引导语

  Review One. For this lesson, you'll need a pencil and a piece  of paper. Listen to this conversation  between a travel agent and a  man who is making plans to take  his family on a trip to Europe.

2、采访游客情景

  Hello, Euro Travel. Judy speaking. How may I help you?  My name is Richard Brodsky. I'd  like to arrange a trip to Europe  for myself and my family. 
  Certainly, sir. How many people  are there in your family?    Besides myself, there are my  wife, my two sons, and my infant  daughter.
  I see. Which cities do you want to visit, and how many nights do  you want to spend in each city?  We want to spend three nights  in London, three nights in Paris,  and four nights in Rome. 
What kind of accommodations  did you have in mind?  I thought my wife and I and the  baby could share a double. Our  two sons can share a twin. 
  With or without a bathroom?  The double should have a bath. The twin doesn't have to have  one.

3、重复听信息学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

    for myself and my family
    a trip to  Europe for myself and my family 
    I'd like to arrange a trip to Europe
  for myself and my family.
    I'd like to arrange a trip to
  Europe for myself and my family.

  How many people are there in
  your family?
  How many people are there in
  your family?

  my infant daughter
  my two sons and my infant
  daughter
  my wife, my two sons, and my
  infant daughter
  Besides myself, there are my
  wife, my two sons, and my infant
  daughter.
  Besides myself, there are my
  wife, my two sons, and my infant
  daughter.

  What kind of accommodations
  did you have in mind?
  What kind of accommodations
  did you have in mind?

  my wife and I and the baby could
  share a double
  I thought my wife and I and the
  baby could share a double.

    I thought my wife and I and the  baby could share a double.
    Our two sons can share a twin.
    Our two sons can share a twin.

    With or without a bathroom?
    With or without a bathroom?

    The double should have a bath.
    The twin doesn't have to have one.
    The double should have a bath.
    The twin doesn't have to have  one.

  4、 关键信息学习引导语:

    Now take your pencil and a piece of paper. You're going to hear  the travel agent repeat the most  important information the  customer gave her. Write down  that information. Remember  that you don't have to write  'every word, just the most  important information. Ready?    Let's begin.

5、自然断句压码记忆信息

      All right, Mr. Brodsky. I'm going
      to go over with you the
      information that you just gave
      me. Please listen carefully. You
      said your name was Richard
      Brodsky. That's B - r - 0 - d - s -
      k - y, right?

      You'll be traveling with your wife,
      your two sons,
      and your infant daughter.

      You plan to spend three nights in London,
      three nights in Paris,
      and four nights in Rome.

      You, your wife, and the baby will share a double,
      and your sons can share a twin.

      The double should have a bath,
      but the twin doesn't have to
      have one.

  6、提问信息引导语:

  Now use your paper to answer  the following questions. Give  short answers.

  7、 信息问答:

  Question One.    What is the customer's name?  Richard Brodsky.
  Question Two.  Who will he be traveling with?  His wife, his two sons, and his  infant daughter.
  Question Three.  What are the three cities they  plan to visit?  London, Paris, and Rome.
  Question Four.    What is the total number of  nights they plan to spend in    Europe?  Ten nights.
  Question Five.  Which city will they spend the  most nights in?    Rome.   
  Question Six.      Who will share the double with  Mr. Brodsky?    His wife and their baby.
  Question Seven.  What will the sons share? A twin.   
  Question Eight.  Which room should have a bath,  the twin or the double?  The double. 

    四、Grand Turk Island 场景报道:
 
  1、引导语:
 
      Now listen to the following talk about an island in the Caribbean  Sea. Don't write anything. Just listen.   

    2、气候情景

  Grand Turk Island is located five  hundred and seventy-five miles from Miami.    It has a wonderful  climate and fabulous beaches.    There are about three thousand  inhabitants on the island, and most are descendants of African  slaves.    It rains very little, and the temperature range is between  twenty-four and thirty degrees  Celsius.    That's seventy-five to  eighty-six degrees Fahrenheit.

    3、引导语:
  Now take your pencil and a piece  of paper and listen to the talk again. After each pause, write  down exactly what you hear.  Ready? Let's begin.

      4、慢放自然断句压码信息

    Grand Turk Island        is located

  five hundred and seventy-five  miles from Miami.

  It has a wonderful climate

  and fabulous beaches.

  There are about three thousand  inhabitants

  on the island,

  and most are descendants

  of African slaves.

  It rains very little,

  and the temperature range

  is between twenty-four and thirty degrees Celsius.

  That's seventy-five to eighty-six  degrees Fahrenheit.
 
    5、重放引导语:

  Now check your paper as you  hear the talk again. Try to  correct any mistakes you find.

    6、连续播放检查信息:
  Grand Turk Island is located five  hundred and seventy-five miles from Miami. It has a wonderful
  climate and fabulous beaches.            There are about three thousand inhabitants on the island, and most are descendants of African slaves.            It rains very little, and the temperature range is between twenty-four and thirty degrees Celsius. That's seventy-five to  eighty-six degrees Fahrenheit.

    7、问答信息引导语:

    Now use your paper to answer  the following questions about  Grand Turk Island. Give short  answers.

    8、信息问答记忆检验:

    Question One.  How far is Grand Turk Island  from Miami?  Five hundred and seventy-five miles.
    Question Two.  What two words are used to  describe the climate and the  beaches?  Wonderful and fabulous.
    Question Three.  How many inhabitants are there  on the island?  About three thousand.
    Question Four.  Who are most of the inhabitants?  Descendants of African slaves.
    Question Five.  How much does it rain on Grand Turk Island?  Very little.
  Question Six.  What is the temperature range in degrees Celsius?  Between twenty-four and thirty
  degrees.
  Question Seven.  What is the temperature range in  degrees Fahrenheit?  Between seventy-five and eighty- six degrees.

  9、结束语:

  And now that you know something about Grand Turk  Island, you might want to go there on your next vacation. Or  at least you can dream of going!
  This is the end of Review One.
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 106 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-10-21 22:46
第十册第四课

一、基本词组:

has always wanted to be.:
been the makeup  person
went to Florida
  met some people
  saw some great beaches
  been to Singapore 
  made a bad mistake
  had a really  exciting time
  saw some of shops

  It was
  Florida is

  one of the most  difficult people
  one of the worst
  one of the best 
  one of the most  beautiful
  one of the most boring
  one of the worst mistakes
one of the most exciting  times
some of the most  terrific

  I've ever  worked with.

  I've ever done
  I've ever seen
  I've ever been to.
  I've ever met
  I've ever made.
  I've ever had.

American English and British English:
gasoline        Petrol.
subway        Underground or tube.
truck            Lorry.


 
二、基本句子:

It was one of the worst makeup  jobs I've ever done.

    Best.  It was one of the best makeup  jobs I've ever done.
    Seen.  It was one of the best makeup  jobs I've ever seen.
    Beaches.  It was one of the best beaches  I've ever seen.
    Most beautiful.  It was one of the most beautiful beaches I've ever seen.
    Been to.  It was one of the most beautiful  beaches I've ever been to.
    Places.  It was one of the most beautiful  places I've ever been to.
    Florida.  Florida is one of the most  beautiful places I've ever been  to.   


So you went to Florida. Was it  really boring? It was one of the most boring  places I've ever gone to.
You met some people there, I hear. Were they nice? They were some of the nicest  people I've ever met.
And you saw some great beaches. Were they really beautiful?  They were some of the most beautiful beaches I've ever seen.
And you've been to Singapore  too. Was it really all that  expensive?  It was one of the most expensive  places I've ever been to.
So you made a bad mistake. Was  it really that bad?  It was one of the worst mistakes  I've ever made.
    But in Milan you had a really  exciting time, didn't you?  It was one of the most exciting  times I've ever had.
  How about the shops? You saw some of them, didn't you?  Weren't they terrific?They were some of the most  terrific shops I've ever seen.

When you're out of petrol in California, you're actually out of . . . what?  Gasoline.

三、场景学习experience

It was one of the worst makeup jobs I've ever done基本句型替换练习:

1、引导语:

    Welcome to Lesson Four. Chris  and Rita are talking about Rita's  experience at WEFL. One of  Rita's worst makeup jobs was on a  woman who wouldn't sit still.  When the job was done, the woman had lipstick. . . where?  Where did the woman have  lipstick? Listen.

2、情景

  You've been the makeup  person here for a long time,  Rita. Can you tell me one of  your favorite moments at  WEFL?      There are so many . . . This  woman was one of the most  difficult people I've ever  worked with.  Why?      She was too energetic. She  wouldn't sit still.  It must have been hard to  put on her makeup.  It was one of the worst  makeup jobs I've ever done.  It couldn't have been that  bad.    It was. She had lipstick on her eyes.  You really love your work, don't you? Oh, yes. I love WEFL.

3、学习:

  Well, where did the woman have  lipstick?    On her eyes.

  Now listen and repeat.

  one of the worst
  one of the worst makeup jobs
  it was one of the worst makeup  jobs   
  I've ever done
  It was one of the worst makeup  jobs I've ever done.
  It was one of the worst makeup jobs I've ever done.

  4、引导语:

  Good. Now you're going to hear a sentence and then a word or  phrase. Use the word or phrase to change the sentence you just  heard. For example, you  hear.. .

  5、学习:

    It was one of the worst makeup  jobs I've ever done.  I say, "Best." And you say. . .  It was one of the best makeup  jobs I've ever done.  Then I say "Seen." And you say. . .  It was one of the best makeup jobs I've ever seen.  Ready? Here we go.

  6、提换练习:

  It was one of the worst makeup  jobs I've ever done.
    Best.  It was one of the best makeup  jobs I've ever done.
    Seen.  It was one of the best makeup  jobs I've ever seen.
    Beaches.  It was one of the best beaches  I've ever seen.
    Most beautiful.  It was one of the most beautiful beaches I've ever seen.
    Been to.  It was one of the most beautiful  beaches I've ever been to.
    Places.  It was one of the most beautiful  places I've ever been to.
    Florida.  Florida is one of the most  beautiful places I've ever been  to.   

四、场景学习wanted to be.:

  1、引导语:

  OK. Let's listen to some more of  the conversation between Rita  and Chris. Rita has always  wanted to be . . . what? Listen carefully for what Rita has always  wanted to be.

  2、情景:

  So when you leave, where  will you go? What will you  do?  There are all kinds of  possibilities    Like what?  I always wanted to be a belly  dancer.  Oh, come on.  Well, on my last vacation I went to Florida, to Palm  Beach.  I've heard of that place.  It was one of the most  beautiful places I've ever  been to.  Really?  And it had some of the most  beautiful beaches I've ever seen.  So are you moving there?  No. It was one of the most  boring places I've ever gone  to . . . I need excitement,  fun, and someone who will  make me laugh.

  3、学习:

  OK. What has Rita always  wanted to be?    A belly dancer.

  Now listen and repeat.

  the most boring
  one of the most boring
  it was one of the most boring  places
  I've ever gone to
  It was one of the most boring  places I've ever gone to.
  It was one of the most boring  places I've ever gone to.

Now you hear. . .  So you went to Florida. Was it  really boring?  And you reply . . .  It was one of the most boring  places I've ever gone to.  You hear. . .  You met some people there, I hear. Were they nice?  And you say . . .    They were some of the nicest  people I've ever met.    All right. Let's begin.

      4、练习:

So you went to Florida. Was it  really boring? It was one of the most boring  places I've ever gone to.
You met some people there, I hear. Were they nice? They were some of the nicest  people I've ever met.
And you saw some great beaches. Were they really beautiful?  They were some of the most beautiful beaches I've ever seen.
And you've been to Singapore  too. Was it really all that  expensive?  It was one of the most expensive  places I've ever been to.
So you made a bad mistake. Was  it really that bad?  It was one of the worst mistakes  I've ever made.
    But in Milan you had a really  exciting time, didn't you?  It was one of the most exciting  times I've ever had.
  How about the shops? You saw some of them, didn't you?  Weren't they terrific?They were some of the most  terrific shops I've ever seen.

五、场景学习same  language  differences expressions

some of the differences between American English and British English:

    1、引导语:

  Very good. Now let's talk about  Britain. Jake is interviewing  James Morgan about some of the differences between American English and British English.  Listen for some of the words that  are different in the two  countries.   

  2、情景:

  Tell me, James. I always thought the British and the Americans spoke the same  language. I mean, we    understand each other, don't  we? Are there really that  many differences?
    Well, of course, it's all  English, isn't it? Some people  may not recognize this. But actually, you're right; we do  speak the same language.
  But then what are these differences I've been hearing  about?   
  Mostly simple words, Jake . . . some expressions.  Depends where you are,  really. For example, you call  the under ground train system    the. . . ?   
  Subway. . . the subway.
  We call it the "tube" or the  "underground. "  That's easy.
  You say, "Can you drive a  truck?" We say, "Can you  drive a lorry?"
    Lorry. Hmmm. I say, there's  a lorry coming.
  Not bad. Then, of course,  what you in America call  "gasoline" we call "petroL"
  Petrol?  Yes. Gasoline is called  "petrol" in Britain.
    Well. . . let's see. Dash it!  My lorry's out of petrol. I  shall have to take the  underground.
    My dear boy, that's  excellent.

    3、练习:

  OK. Now let's see how much you  remember. What's the British  word for gasoline? Petrol.
  And the British word for subway? Underground or tube.
  How about truck? Lorry.
    You are in New York City and  you want to know where the  nearest underground station is.  What do you say?
  Where's the nearest subway  station?

  You are crossing the street with an American friend. She doesn't  see the lorry coming. You say,
  "Watch out for the . . . !" what?  Truck.
  When you're out of petrol in California, you're actually out of . . . what?  Gasoline.

  This is the end of Lesson Four.


sunyuting1 2007-10-22 22:00
第十册第五课

一、基本词组such,so much,figure out:

1.such:
such
  such a 
  such an

2.so
so much
so sure
so upset
so strange
so damaged
so mysterious
Have you
Are you
Isn't
Would you
Will you
Can you
Do you

3.figure out
to solve
to understand
figure out

I can  figure out ,
I can't  figure out
want to figure out
have to figure out
Who can figure out
trying to figure out
Did you  figure out

二、基本句子

He's such a good cameramen.
I've thought so much about it I'm dizzy
I can't figure it out either.


1.do or be ,such or such a:
Mike does such good work.He's such a good cameramen.

2.such a or such an  :
Mike's such a good cameramen.Roger Ward is such an  excellent editor.

3.such a or such :
This place is a mess.    This place is such a mess.
These are important questions.    These are such important  questions.

4.noun is singular or plural ,such a and such an or such :

  These videotapes are silly.    These are such silly videotapes. 
    That interview was excellent. That was such an excellent  interview.
  These ratings are just awful.  These are just such awful ratings.
    That nature center is really  pretty.  That's really such a pretty nature center.
    Those decisions are tough.  Those are such tough decisions.
  This exercise is easy.  This is such an easy exercise.


so
5.  so much:
I've thought so much about it I'm dizzy

6.  so sure 
  I'm so sure I didn't give him this  tape

7.Have you ,Are you , Isn't ,Would you ,Will you ,Can you ,Do you  with so much , so sure ,so upset ,so strange ,so mysterious :

Have you thought much about it? You look dizzy.  I've thought so much about it  that I'm dizzy.
  Are you sure you didn't give him  this tape? Would you bet money  on it?  I'm so sure I didn't give him this  tape that I'd bet money on it.
  Are you upset with this mess?  Will you try anything?  I'm so upset with this mess that  I'll try anything.
  Isn't this strange? Can you  believe it?  This is so strange that I can't  believe it.
    Is the tape damaged? Can you  use it?  The tape is so damaged that I can't use it.
    Isn't it mysterious? Do you know  what to do next?    It's so mysterious that I don't  know what to do next.


8.figure out:
I really can't figure out why anyone would want to ruin all this.  I can't figure it out either.

9.I can , I can't ,want to , have to ,Who can , trying to ,Did you ,with understand and  figure out
I really can't understand why anyone would want to ruin all this. I really can't figure out why anyone would want to ruin all  this.
I can't understand it either. I can't figure it out either.
We have to understand what's  happening here. We have to figure out what's  happening here.
Who can understand them? Who can figure them out?
I'm trying to understand what  they want. I'm trying to figure out what they  want.
Did you understand how it  happened?: Did you figure out how it  happened?No. I can't understand it. No, I can't figure it out.

三、场景学习such or such a and such an:

1、引导语:
  Welcome to Lesson Five. Jake and  Roger Ward, a new member of  the WEFL staff, are looking at a  videotape. Let's listen to their  conversation. Listen carefully for  exactly what Roger's job is at WEFL.

2、情景
such a  good cameraman need such an  excellent editor to  help out an old friend for does such  good ratings:

    You've been here for a week, Roger. How do you like it?  Just fine, Jake. I'm glad I had a few extra weeks to  help out an old friend.  Well, it's great to have you at WEFL. We need a good  editor, and we need some  good ratings. You'll like  Mike Davis. He's such a  good cameraman. His work is excellent. His work is so  good that I hardly need to edit it.  Well, then you don't need me.  Of course we need you,  Roger. But Mike does such  good work that editing is  easier. Here, let me show  you . . . This place is so  messy that I can never find  anything. It was clean  yesterday. Ah, here it is.

3、学习such or such a:
    OK. What is Roger's job at  WEFL?    He's an editor.

  Now listen and repeat.

    such    such good work
  Mike does such good work.
  Mike does such good work.
  such    such a good cameraman
  He's such a good cameraman.
  He's such a good cameramen.

4、引导语such a or such an  :

  We use such before a noun (with  or without an adjective) to give  emphasis to what we are saying.  Let's practice such. Remember,  when the indefinite article a or  an is present ,for example, a good cameraman or an excellent  editor such comes first: such a  good cameraman or such an  excellent editor. Never say "A  such good cameraman" or "A  such excellent editor." Now you hear.. .

5、学习:

  He's a good cameraman.  And you say . . .  He's such a good cameraman.    You hear. . .    Mike does good work.  And you say . . .  Mike does such good work.  Ready? Let's go.

6、练习such a or such :

    He's a good cameraman.  He's such a good cameraman.
  Mike does good work.  Mike does such good work.
    This place is a mess.    This place is such a mess.
    These are important questions.    These are such important  questions.

  Now you hear. . .  These videotapes are silly.  And you say . . . These are such silly  videotapes. You hear. . .  That interview was excellent.    And you say . . .  That was such an excellent  interview.

7、引导语noun is singular or plural

  Notice that when the noun is singular, you use such a or such an. When the noun is plural, you  use only such. OK? Let's  continue.

8、练习such a and such an or such :

  These videotapes are silly.    These are such silly videotapes. 
    That interview was excellent. That was such an excellent  interview.
  These ratings are just awful.  These are just such awful ratings.
    That nature center is really  pretty.  That's really such a pretty nature center.
    Those decisions are tough.  Those are such tough decisions.
  This exercise is easy.  This is such an easy exercise.

四、场景学习 so much      so sure:

1、引导语:

  Very good. Mike is trying to  figure out the mystery of the  videotape mess. He's thought so  much about it that he's. . .  what? Listen for the word that  describes Mike's condition.

2、情景:
      I'm trying to figure out how  this vacation tape . . . got out  on the air . . . This wiring is  such a mess that I'll never  figure it out. . . Someone  might have left the tape in an  editing machine. But how  could someone put it on the air by mistake? . . . I've  thought so much about it that  I'm dizzy. . . I couldn't have  given the wrong tape to the  tape operator by accident. I'm  so sure I didn't give him this  tape that I'd bet money on it.

3、压码替换学习:

  OK. What word did you hear describing Mike's condition?    Dizzy.

  Now listen and repeat.
    so    so much
  I've thought so much about it
  I'm dizzy
  I've thought so much about it
  that I'm dizzy.
  I've thought so much about it
  that I'm dizzy.
  so    so sure
  I'm so sure
  I'm so sure I didn't give him this
  tape
  I'd bet money on it
  I'm so sure I didn't give him this
  tape that I'd bet money on it.
  I'm so sure I didn't give him this
  tape that I'd bet money on it.

4、引导语:

  We use so before an adverb or an  adjective alone, without the  noun, again to emphasize what  we are saying: for example, so  much or so sure or even so dizzy.  Let's practice some sentences  with so. You hear. . .

5、学习:

  Have you thought much about  it? You look dizzy.    And you say. . .  I've thought so much about it  that I'm dizzy. You hear. . .  Are you sure you didn't give him  this tape? Would you bet money on it?
  And you say . . .  I'm so sure I didn't give him this  tape that I'd bet money on it.  All right? Here we go.

6、练习:

  Have you thought much about it? You look dizzy.  I've thought so much about it  that I'm dizzy.
  Are you sure you didn't give him  this tape? Would you bet money  on it?  I'm so sure I didn't give him this  tape that I'd bet money on it.
  Are you upset with this mess?  Will you try anything?  I'm so upset with this mess that  I'll try anything.
  Isn't this strange? Can you  believe it?  This is so strange that I can't  believe it.
    Is the tape damaged? Can you  use it?  The tape is so damaged that I can't use it.
    Isn't it mysterious? Do you know  what to do next?    It's so mysterious that I don't  know what to do next.

五、场景学习figure out:

1、引导语:

  It's such a beautiful day that Jake  and Chris decide to go for a walk  in the Stamford Nature Center.  Listen carefully for the two-word  verb figure out. How many times  do you hear figure out in the  conversation?

2、情景:

  Gee, these woods are so  pleasant. Look at these  wonderful old trees. It's so quiet  here. Just the sounds of the  ducks. I really can't figure out  why anyone would want to ruin  all this just to build some awful apartments.  Yeah. I can't figure it out  either. Listen. You can hear the  cows. I suppose it's money. Someone  wants to make a lot of money  and doesn't care how. You're right, of course. . . but  who? We've got to figure out  what's happening here. Who  wants to build apartments in  such a beautiful place? And, Chris . . . Yes? We have to stop them before it's too late.

3、学习:

Well, how many times did you  hear the verb figure out? Three times.

Now listen and repeat.

figure out
I really can't figure out
why anyone would want
why anyone would want to ruin all this
I really can't figure out why anyone would want to ruin all this.
I really can't figure out why anyone would want to ruin all this.

  I can't figure it out either.
  I can't figure it out either.

4、引导语:

To figure out means to solve, to understand": She understood the problem. She figured out the problem. They mean almost the same. Notice that when the verb figure out is used with a pronoun (for example, it), the pronoun always comes between figure and out: I can't figure it out. Let's practice figure out. You hear. . .

5、学习:
  I really can't understand why anyone would want to ruin all  this.    And you say . . .: I really can't figure out why anyone would want to ruin all  this. You hear. . . I can't understand it either.And you say . . . I can't figure it out either. OK? Let's begin.

6、练习:

I really can't understand why anyone would want to ruin all this. I really can't figure out why anyone would want to ruin all  this.
I can't understand it either. I can't figure it out either.
We have to understand what's  happening here. We have to figure out what's  happening here.
Who can understand them? Who can figure them out?
I'm trying to understand what  they want. I'm trying to figure out what they  want.

Did you understand how it  happened?: Did you figure out how it  happened?
No. I can't understand it. No, I can't figure it out.

This is the end of Lesson Five.


sunyuting1 2007-10-24 21:23
第十册复习二

一、基本词组:

such and so:

such a mess  
so many tough questions
so intelligent  
such great work
Such a nice guy.
So puzzled.
Such experienced professionals.
So well.
Such easy answers.
Such a silly exercise

I was .... when


二、基本句子:

That was a silly exercise.That was such a silly exercise.
The answers were easy. The answers were so easy.

such and so:

Mike isn't doing well lately. Mike isn't doing so well lately.
He has many tough questions to figure out. He has so many tough questions to figure out.
But he's an intelligent guy.But he's such an intelligent guy.
He's always done terrific work at WEFL.He's always done such terrifitwork at WEFL.
And Rita isn't really silly. And Rita isn't really so silly.
Mike and Rita are good friends. Mike and Rita are such good friends.

  I was walking by the editing  room when I heard this strange noise.
  I was closing the studio when I  saw Rita listening at the door.


Walk by the editing room. . . hear this  strange noise.  I was walking by the editing  room when I heard this strange  noise.
  Close the studio . . . see Rita  listening at the door.  I was closing the studio when I saw Rita listening at the door.
Leave the building . . .  remember the lights.  I was leaving the building when I  remembered the lights.
  Work late. . . notice someone  in the hall.  I was working late when I  noticed someone in the hall.
Drive home . . . think of the  answer.  I was driving home when I  thought of the answer.
  Think of you. . . buy these  flowers. I was thinking of you when I  bought these flowers.
  Begin to worry . . . get your letter.  I was beginning to worry when I  got your letter.

三、场景学习such and so:

1、引导语

Mike and Rita are talking about wath's happing  that's mention the names of three people: Roger, Jake, and Chris:

  Review Two. Mike and Rita are talking about what's going on at
WEFL. They mention the names of three people. Listen for what the three names are.

2、情景

why did the conversation between Rita and Mike talking about  in the Mike's editing room where It's such a mess.:

   Well, how are things going in the editing room, Mike?  Don't ask. You're not doing so well,
huh?  It's such a mess. Have you figured out yet  where the problem is? No. I'm so puzzled by it all, Rita, I don't know where to begin. There are so many tough questions . . . and no easy answers. What about Roger, the new  editor? Has he been any help? Roger's a nice guy. . . so intelligent too. He does such great work. But this is really not his problem.  And Jake. . . or Chris?
  Surely they. . .They've been so busy figuring out the apartment business at the Nature Center that they haven't had time to help. Well, maybe there's a connection. A connection? What do you
  mean?I mean, maybe there's a connection between the mess with the tapes and the people who want to build apartments in the Nature Center. Have you thought of that? Oh, come on, Rita. You're so  silly sometimes.

3、压码学习using such a or so have a little more difficult


  OK. What are the three names that come up in the conversation between Rita and Mike? Roger, Jake, and Chris.

  Now listen and repeat.

  such a mess  such a mess
  so many tough questions
  so many tough questions
  so intelligent  so intelligent
  such great work
  such great work


4、引导组词:

Good. Now I say, "Mess." And you say . . . Such a mess.  I say, "Many tough questions.
And you say. . .So many tough questions. Ready? Here we go.

5、练习词组词组选择Such a or so:

Mess.
such a mess.

Many tough questions.
So many tough questions.

Intelligent.
So intelligent.

Great work.
Such great work.

Nice guy.
Such a nice guy.

Puzzled.
So puzzled.

Experienced professionals.
Such experienced professionals.

Well.
So well.

Easy answers.
Such easy answers.

Silly exercise.
Such a silly exercise.

5、引导造句:

Very good. Now let's try something a little more difficult. You hear. . .That was a silly exercise. And you say. . .That was such a silly exercise.  You hear. . .The answers were easy. And you say . . .The answers were so easy. OK? Here we go.

6、练习句子添加such a or so:

That was a silly exercise.    That was such a silly exercise.
  The answers were easy.    The answers were so easy.
  Mike isn't doing well lately.  Mike isn't doing so well lately.
  He has many tough questions to figure out.  He has so many tough questions to figure out.
  But he's an intelligent guy.But he's such an intelligent guy.
  He's always done terrific work at WEFL.He's always done such terrific work at WEFL.
  And Rita isn't really silly. And Rita isn't really so silly.
  Mike and Rita are good friends. Mike and Rita are such good friends.

四、场景学习:

1、情景:Rata heard a noise in  the editing room

  OK. Now let's listen to this.
  Hey! What's going on?  Who's in there?    What is it, Rita? What's the matter?  I don't know, Mike.  I  thought I heard a noise in  the editing room.  But it's locked.

2、引导语:

  Well, things are getting more and  more mysterious at WEFL. Let's  listen some more and see what's happening.

3、情景Rata  heard this strange noise going on:

  I was walking by the editing room when I heard this strange noise.    What kind of noise?  I don't know what it was.  But I thought someone was in there. You see, I was just  leaving the building when I  remembered the lights.  The lights?  Yeah. I forgot to turn off  the lights. So I came back  and.. .  What's going on here?  I'm glad you're here, I was closing the studio when I saw Rita  listening at the door. She  thinks there's someone in  the editing room.

4、学习I was .... when :

  Now listen and repeat.

  I was walking by the editing  room
  when I heard this strange noise
  I was walking by the editing room when I heard this strange  noise.
  I was walking by the editing  room when I heard this strange noise.

  I was closing the studio
  when I saw Rita listening at the  door
  I was closing the studio when I saw Rita listening at the door.
  I was closing the studio when I  saw Rita listening at the door.

  5、引导造句连接简单句为复杂句:

Now I say, "Walk by the editing room . . . hear this strange  noise. And you say. . .  I was walking y the editing room when I heard this strange  noise.  I say, "Close the studio. . . see  Rita listening at the door." And you say . . .  I was closing the studio when I  saw Rita listening at the door.  All right. Let's begin.

6、练习造复杂句子:

  Walk by the editing room. . . hear this  strange noise.  I was walking by the editing room when I heard this strange  noise.
Close the studio . . . see Rita  listening at the door.  I was closing the studio when I saw Rita listening at the door.
Leave the building . . .  remember the lights.      I was leaving the building when I  remembered the lights.
Work late. . . notice someone  in the hall.    I was working late when I  noticed someone in the hall.
Drive home . . . think of the  answer.    I was driving home when I  thought of the answer.
Think of you. . . buy these  flowers.    I was thinking of you when I  bought these flowers.
  Begin to worry . . . get your letter.        I was beginning to worry when I  got your letter.

  That's all for now. This is the end of Review Two.


sunyuting1 2007-10-27 06:48
第十册第六课

一、基本词组:

  It's such a 。。。for
  so or  such

1、句子拓展连接词:

were
  It's such a 。。。for
We 。。。  We
He's so 。。。that
How many  。。。 in all were 。。 during  。。at 。。
He's one of the  most 。。。I've  ever known
I never thought。。。 I'd feel .
We  went out to。。and we  had。。that we 。。
It was 。。I've ever .
It was so 。。 that it was 。。.
It was 。。We talked about 。。.
He's such a 。。  You are。。.
You should have 。。 We 。。that 。。. And we've been 。。
It's really 。。。I think 。。


2、句子拓展连接单词 such a :

  a strange place 
such a
such a strange  place   
such a wonderful
it's such a
for  someone to be. 
for a man to live.
for a man to work.

3、复杂句子搭配单词:

one of the  most interesting
I've  ever known
I don't even  think about
You should have

4、so or  such不同的用法单词:
so hard
such a good time
that
we stayed until

such an interesting
so well
so little time
such tough work
so easy

二、基本句子:

 
  It's such a strange place for someone to be.   
    We laughed so hard, we cried.
    We had such a good time that we  stayed until the restaurant closed

  1、问答信息句子:

    How many people in all  were present at the Nature  Center during the filming?
    What's the last word? We  laughed so hard, we . . . what?  Cried.

  2、  It's such a 。。。for 。。基本句式替换:

  It's such a strange place for someone to be.   

  A man.      It's such a strange place for a  man to be.   

  Wonderful.      It's such a wonderful place for a  man to be.   

    Live.          It's such a wonderful place for a  man to live.   

  Stamford.  Stamford is such a wonderful  place for a man to live.

  Town.        Stamford is such a wonderful town for a man to live.

  Work.        Stamford is such a wonderful  town for a man to work.

  People.    Stamford is such a wonderful town for people to work.

  3、添加so or such 的复杂句子句型合成:

    We laughed so hard, we cried.


  We laughed hard. We cried.      We laughed so hard, we cried.

  We had a good time. We stayed until the restaurant closed.          We had such a good time that  we stayed until the restaurant  closed.   

    The food was bad. It was funny.        The food was so bad, it was  funny.   

  He's an interesting man. I can't  think of anything else these days.        He's such an interesting man  that I can't think of anything  else these days.   

  We danced well together. People  stopped to watch.          We danced so well together,  people stopped to watch.

  There's little time left today.  Maybe we should continue  tomorrow morning.          There's so little time left today,  maybe we should continue  tomorrow morning.

    It's really tough work. I'm  exhausted at the end of the day.        It's really such tough work that I'm exhausted at the end of the  day.   

  This is easy. I think we should  stop now.      This is so easy, I think we should  stop now.   

三、场景学习:

1、场景引导语:

This is Lesson Six. Chris and Jake  are looking at some of the video- tapes Chris took at the Nature  Center. How many  people in all were present during  the filming at the Nature Center?  Listen.

2、情景:


  Some of these shots might  work, Jake.  The camera's so shaky, I  can't see what's happening.  What is that? I don't  remember anyone out there.  Of course I was holding the  camera for such a long time  that my arm almost fell off.  The tape's moving so fast  that I can't see. Let's slow it  down.  Look at that. That's a  person.  Wait a minute. I was there. Mike was there. You were  there. I don't remember  anybody else.  It's such a strange place for  someone to be. Behind a  tree?   

3、学习:

  OK. How many people in all  were present at the Nature  Center during the filming?

Four. Mike, Jake, Chris, and the  mystery person behind the tree.


  Now listen and repeat.

  a strange place 

  such a strange  place   

  it's such a strange place

  It's such a strange place for  someone to be.   

  It's such a strange place for  someone to be.   

4、引导替换

  Now you hear. . .    It's such a strange place for someone to be.      I say, "A man." And you say. . . It's such a strange place for a  man to be.      I say, "Wonderful." And you  say.. .      It's such a wonderful place for a  man to be.      OK? Let's begin.

5、替换练习:

  It's such a strange place for someone to be.   

  A man.      It's such a strange place for a  man to be.   

  Wonderful.      It's such a wonderful place for a  man to be.   

    Live.          It's such a wonderful place for a  man to live.   

  Stamford.  Stamford is such a wonderful  place for a man to live.

  Town.        Stamford is such a wonderful town for a man to live.

  Work.        Stamford is such a wonderful  town for a man to work.

  People.    Stamford is such a wonderful town for people to work.

四、场景学习:

1、引导语:
    Listen to Rita telling Chris about  her new boyfriend. At one point  Rita says, "We laughed so hard,  we . . ." what? Listen for the  sentence, "We laughed so hard,  we . . . "What's the last word of  that sentence?   

2、情景:

    I met a man. He's one of the  most interesting men I've  ever known. He's so  interesting that I don't even  think about my job.  What's his name?  Terry. Terry Smithers. I never thought I'd feel this  way toward anybody again.  A friend introduced us. We  went out to dinner and we  had such a good time that we  stayed until the restaurant  closed. And the food was so  bad! It was one of the worst  restaurants I've ever been to.  It was so bad that it was  funny. We laughed so hard,  we cried. It was wonderful.  We talked about everything.  And after that, we went  dancing.  No.  Yes. He's such a good  dancer.  You are too.  You should have seen us  dance. We danced so well  together that people stopped  to watch. And we've been  together ever since.

3、学习:

  Well? What's the last word? We  laughed so hard, we . . . what?  Cried.

  Now listen and repeat.

  we laughed so hard

  We laughed so hard, we cried.

  We laughed so hard, we cried.

  we had such a good time

that we stayed until the restaurant closed

  We had such a good time that we stayed until the restaurant  closed.

  We had such a good time that  we stayed until the restaurant closed.

4、引导练习

    Now you hear. . .  We laughed hard. We cried.  You say. . .  We laughed so hard, we cried.    You hear. . .  We had a good time. We stayed until the restaurant closed.  You say. . .  We had such a good time that we  stayed until the restaurant closed.  Ready? Let's begin.

5、合成句子练习:

  We laughed hard. We cried.      We laughed so hard, we cried.

  We had a good time. We stayed until the restaurant closed.          We had such a good time that  we stayed until the restaurant  closed.   

    The food was bad. It was funny.        The food was so bad, it was  funny.   

  He's an interesting man. I can't  think of anything else these days.        He's such an interesting man  that I can't think of anything  else these days.   

  We danced well together. People  stopped to watch.          We danced so well together,  people stopped to watch.

  There's little time left today.  Maybe we should continue  tomorrow morning.          There's so little time left today,  maybe we should continue  tomorrow morning.

    It's really tough work. I'm  exhausted at the end of the day.        It's really such tough work that I'm exhausted at the end of the  day.   

  This is easy. I think we should  stop now.      This is so easy, I think we should  stop now.   

    So do I. This is the end of Lesson  Six.
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 107 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-10-27 15:27
第十册第七课

一、基本词组:

wanted him to
want to go
needed me to
wanted her to
asked her to
in.
up
out.
off.
over
I have to hand
She has to

1. verbs are  followed by a gerund and by an  infinitive:
            a verb in  the base form

                enjoyed. . .    walk. . . in the park.: enjoy walking
                didn't want. . . go . . .  back to work:  didn't want to go back to 
                wanted him . . . tell . . .  her about
                avoided. . . say. . .  anything about  :  avoided saying
                needed her. . . stay. . .  home      :  needed me to ask
                kept . . . try . . . to get  :  kept on trying to figure out
              just wanted her. . . quit  . . . thinking about 
                He asked her . . . think . . .  about  :  asked her to think about 

二、基本句子:

  She wanted him to tell her  something.  But he avoided saying anything  about it.
    Lucy and Ricky enjoyed. . .    walk. . . in the park.  Lucy and Ricky enjoyed walking  in the park.
    I have to hand in this report. I have to hand this report in. I have to hand it in.
    The computer pointed out my  mistakes.  The computer pointed my  mistakes out.   
    I have to run off a few copies. I have to run a few copies off.
    I have to type it again. That's right. You have to type it  over.
    I  love the peace and quiet.  Peace  Peace. p-e-a-c-e.

1.verbs are  followed by a gerund and by an  infinitive:

    We enjoy walking in the park. We didn't want to go back to  work.
    She wanted him to tell her  something.  But he avoided saying anything  about it.
    He needed me to ask Mike to do  something.  I kept on trying to figure out the  reason.
    He just wanted her to quit thinking about it.
    He asked her to think about  their relationship instead.
 
    a verb in  the base form:

  Lucy and Ricky enjoyed. . .    walk. . . in the park.  Lucy and Ricky enjoyed walking  in the park.
  They didn't want. . . go . . .  back to work.:    They didn't want to go back to  work.
  She wanted him . . . tell . . .  her about his new show.  She wanted him to tell her about  his new show.
    He avoided. . . say. . .  anything about it.  He avoided saying anything
    about it.
    He needed her. . . stay. . .  home and answer the phone.  He needed her to stay home and  answer the phone.
    Lucy kept . . . try . . . to get a  job in Ricky's show.  Lucy kept trying to get a job in Ricky's show.
    He just wanted her. . . quit  . . . thinking about it.    He just wanted her to quit  thinking about it.
    He asked her . . . think . . .  about their maITiage instead.    He asked her to think about  their maITiage instead.

    2. separable two- word verbs have two different  forms:
    I have to hand in this report.
    I have to hand this report in.
    I have to hand it in.

    She has to type up this report.
    She has to type this report up.
    She has to type it up.
   
    I just cross out the mistake.
    I just cross the mistake out.
    I just cross it out.

    The computer points out the  mistakes.   
    The computer points the  mistakes out.   
    The computer points them out.

    It fills in the COITect spelling.
    It fills the COITect spelling in.
    It fills it in.   

    I have to hand in this report.
    I have to hand this report in.
    The computer pointed out my  mistakes.   
    The computer pointed my  mistakes out.   
      I have to cross my mistakes out.
      I have to cross out my mistakes.
      The machine fills in the correct spelling.   
      The machine fills the correct spelling in.   
      I have to run off a few copies.
      I have to run a few copies off.
      It's time to shut the computer  off.   
      It's time to shut off the computer.   

  3。separable two-word verbs express the same idea :

      I have to deliver my report. That's right. You have to hand it  in.
      I have to type a copy of it. That's right. You have to type it  up.
      I have to type it again. That's right. You have to type it  over.
      The computer will print a copy.That's right. The computer will  print it out.
      I have to clean the room  thoroughly.  That's right. You have to clean it  up.
      I have to draw a line through my  mistake. That's right. You have to cross it  out.
      The computer identifies the  mistake.That's right. The computer picks  it out.
      I have to return the books to  their proper places.That's right. You have to put  them away.
      My computer shows where the  mistakes are. That's right. Your computer  points them out.
      I'm going to make the copies on  a photocopier.  That's right. You're going to run  them off.
      My computer adds the correct  spelling.That's right. Your computer fills  it in.
      I have to discard the paper.That's right. You have to throw  it away.

    4。spell  the homonym :

I  love the peace and quiet.  Peace  Peace. p-e-a-c-e.
  Would you like a piece of my  ornge? Piece.  Piece. p-i-e-c-e.
  The flight is four hours long.  Four. Four... f-o-u-r.
  He works for his father's    company. For. For...f-o-r.
  Let's go swimming in the sea.  Sea. See... s-e-a.
    I don't see any of my friends  here. See. See... s-e-e.
  She bought a blue hat. Blue.  Blue... b-l-u-e.
  Blew...b-l-e-w. The wind blew her hat away. Blew..  Blew...b-l-e-w.


三、场景学习gerund.infinitive,  direct object :

  verbs are  followed by a gerund.Others are followed by an  infinitive, sometimes with a  direct object in front of it:

1、引导语:

Welcome to Lesson Seven.  Listen to Rita as she talks about  a recent experience with her boyfriend, Terry.

2、情景:

  Terry and I enjoy walking in  the park. Yesterday we went  for a walk, and we didn't want  to go back to work right away.  I wanted him to tell me what  he was working on, but he  avoided saying anything about  it. I couldn't understand why  he needed me to ask Mike to  let him into the editing room.  I kept on trying to figure out  the reason, but Terry just  wanted me to quit thinking  about it. He asked me to think  about our relationship instead.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

  We enjoy walking in the park.
    We enjoy walking in the park.
    We didn't want to go back to  work.
    We didn't want to go back to  work.
   
  She wanted him to tell her  something.
    She wanted him to tell her  something.
    But he avoided saying anything  about it.
    But he avoided saying anything  about it.

  He needed me to ask Mike to do  something.
    He needed me to ask Mike to do  something.
    I kept on trying to figure out the  reason.
    I kept on trying to figure out the  reason.

  He just wanted her to quit
    thinking about it.
    He just wanted her to quit
    thinking about it.
    He asked her to think about
    their relationship instead.
    He asked her to think about
    their relationship instead.

4、引导学习:

verbs  followed by a gerund,infinitive,  direct object :

  Notice how some verbs are  followed by a gerund. For  example. . .  We enjoy walking.  He avoided saying anything.  Others are followed by an  infinitive, sometimes with a  direct object in front of it. For  example. . . They didn't want to go.  She wanted him to tell her something.  He wanted her to do something.  Now you're going to hear a  sentence that includes a verb in  the base form. Complete the  sentence using either the gerund or the infinitive. For example, you hear . . .

        Lucy and Ricky enjoyed. . .    walk . . . in the park.  And you say. . .  Lucy and Ricky enjoyed walking  in the park.  Or you hear. . .  They didn't want. . . go. . .  back to work.  And you say. . .  They didn't want to go back to  work.  All right? Let's begin.

5、练习:

  Lucy and Ricky enjoyed. . .    walk. . . in the park.  Lucy and Ricky enjoyed walking  in the park.
  They didn't want. . . go . . .  back to work.:    They didn't want to go back to  work.
  She wanted him . . . tell . . .  her about his new show.  She wanted him to tell her about  his new show.
  He avoided. . . say. . .  anything about it.  He avoided saying anything
    about it.
    He needed her. . . stay. . .  home and answer the phone.  He needed her to stay home and  answer the phone.
    Lucy kept . . . try . . . to get a  job in Ricky's show.  Lucy kept trying to get a job in Ricky's show.
  He just wanted her. . . quit  . . . thinking about it.    He just wanted her to quit  thinking about it.
  He asked her . . . think . . .  about their maITiage instead.    He asked her to think about  their maITiage instead.

四、场景学习two- word verbs have two different  forms;

1、引导语:

    Now listen to Chris as she talks  about her computer and her  problems writing a report.  Notice  all the two-word verbs she uses.

2、情景:

I have to hand in this report  tomorrow, and I have to type it up myself. Thank heaven  for computers. If I make a  mistake, I don't have to type  it over. I just cross out the  mistake . . . Oh, I'm such a    bad typist. It's so hard to pick  out the mistakes on this  screen. . . Fortunately, this  computer can check spelling.  I just hit this button . . .  The computer points out the  mistakes and fills in the corect spelling automatically  . . . I just need to print out    the pages, . . . and run off  some copies. . . and we're  all set. . . I forgot to clean  up. I have to put away the pencils, . . . throw  away this  paper, . . . and shut off the  computer.

3、学习:

  Now listen to and repeat these  sentences with two-word verbs.

    I have to hand in this report.
    I have to hand this report in.
    I have to hand it in.

    She has to type up this report.
    She has to type this report up.
    She has to type it up.
   
    I just cross out the mistake.
    I just cross the mistake out.
    I just cross it out.

    The computer points out the  mistakes.   
    The computer points the  mistakes out.   
    The computer points them out.

    It fills in the correct spelling.
    It fills the correct spelling in.
    It fills it in.   

4、引导学习:

Notice how these separable two- word verbs have two different  forms. For example, you can  say. . .      I have to hand in this report.  Or you can say. . .    I have to hand this report in.

Now you're going to hear a  sentence with a two-word verb  using one of these two forms. Repeat the sentence, changing it to the other form. For example,  you hear . . .   

  I have to hand in this report.    And you say . . .    I have to hand this report in.  Or you hear. . .  The computer pointed out my  mistakes.      And you say . . .  The computer pointed my  mistakes out.      OK? Let's begin.

5、练习:

    I have to hand in this report.
    I have to hand this report in.
    The computer pointed out my  mistakes.   
    The computer pointed my  mistakes out.   
      I have to cross my mistakes out.
      I have to cross out my mistakes.
    The machine fills in the correct spelling.   
      The machine fills the correct spelling in.   
      I have to run off a few copies.
      I have to run a few copies off.
      It's time to shut the computer off.   
      It's time to shut off the computer.   

五、场景学习 separable two-word verbs express the same idea :

1、引导语:

  Now let's see if you remember  what these two-word verbs  mean. You're going to hear a sentence that uses another verb  to express the same idea as one  of the two-word verbs. Respond  to the sentence using one of the  separable two-word verbs.  Change the direct-object noun  to a pronoun. For example, you  hear.. .

2、引导学习:

  I have to deliver my report.  And you say . . .  That's right. You have to hand it  in.  Or you hear. .    I have to type a copy of it.  And you say . . .  That's right. You have to type it  up.  All right? Let's begin.

3、练习:

      I have to deliver my report. That's right. You have to hand it  in.
      I have to type a copy of it. That's right. You have to type it  up.
      I have to type it again. That's right. You have to type it  over.
    The computer will print a copy.That's right. The computer will  print it out.
    I have to clean the room  thoroughly.  That's right. You have to clean it  up.
    I have to draw a line through my  mistake. That's right. You have to cross it  out.
    The computer identifies the  mistake.That's right. The computer picks  it out.
    I have to return the books to  their proper places.That's right. You have to put  them away.
    My computer shows where the  mistakes are. That's right. Your computer  points them out.
    I'm going to make the copies on  a photocopier.  That's right. You're going to run  them off.
    My computer adds the correct  spelling.That's right. Your computer fills  it in.
    I have to discard the paper.That's right. You have to throw  it away.

  六、场景学习spell  the homonym :

1、引导语:

    Now, to end this lesson, listen to  these sentences.

  I love the peace and quiet here.  Would you like a piece of my  orange?
   
Did you notice the homonyms in those sentence? They were  peace, splled p-c-a-c-e, and piece, spelled p-i-e-c-e.Now listen to these sentences.


I think I know the reason, but it dosen't make sence. That book cost a dollar and fifty cebts.

The homonyms in those sentences were sence, spelled c-e-n-s-e, and cents, spelled s-e-n-t-s. Now you're going  to hear a sentense that contains  a homonym. After each  sentence, repeat and then spell  the homonym in that sentence. Fow exmaple, you hear...

  2、引导学习:

I live the peace and quiet.  peace.  And you say... Peace... p-e-a-c-e. Or you hear... Would you like a piece of my orange? Piece. And you say...  Piece... p-i-e-c-e.  OK? Let's begin.

  3、练习:
    I  love the peace and quiet.  Peace  Peace. p-e-a-c-e.
  Would you like a piece of my  ornge? Piece.  Piece. p-i-e-c-e.
  The flight is four hours long.  Four. Four... f-o-u-r.
  He works for his father's    company. For. For...f-o-r.
  Let's go swimming in the sea.  Sea. See... s-e-a.
    I don't see any of my friends  here. See. See... s-e-e.
  She bought a blue hat. Blue.  Blue... b-l-u-e.
  Blew...b-l-e-w. The wind blew her hat away. Blew..  Blew...b-l-e-w.

  End of Lesson Seven..


sunyuting1 2007-10-27 16:03
第十册第八课

一、基本词组:

1、短语:

I look back on
  I laugh at
  I pay attention to
  He listens to
  He talks about
  I look for 
  I wait for
  It's improtant to
  He talked about
  You should watch for
  I'd like to
  Please look at
  Tell me what you think about
    speak to
    type it over
  looked it up
  Throw it away

as he  talks about to Mike as

2、词组
preposition :to,at, for,with。
two-word verb: look  up" and "type  over”
direct-object pronoun  :it
type it over
  looked it up
Throw it away

3、提问回答的词组:

Did Chris show
Yes, she did.
What did Jeke say
  He said
  Mike talked about
  Did he talk about
He talking to Cheis about 
Did he talk to Chris about
He said
What did he say
Can I help you 
Would you please
It would help me
what you  think about
Are  you sure about
I think you'd 

what did you think
I thought
Did you think 
How did you like
was it marvelous or terrible
it was marvelous
  How was your


二、基本句子:

1、simple past  tence:

  Did Chris show her interview    tape to Jake?  Yes, she did.
  What did Jeke say about the  interview?  He said it was interesting.

  Yes. Chris showed her interview  tape to Jake.    Did Chris show her interview  tape to Jake?
  He said it was interview. What did he say about it? 
  Yes.  Mike talked about his interview. Did he talk about his interview?
  Mike said he lived his job.  What did Mike said he loved his job?
  He said he paid attention to details.  What did he say he paid attention to?
  Yes. He talking to Cheis about    the technical problems.Did he talk to Chris about the technical problems?
  He  said it was impotant  listen carefully.  What did he say it was impotant  to do?

2、 verbs with preposition:  talk to  , talk about;look at ,look for

      I look back on those years.
      I laugh at those people.
      I pay attention to details.
    He listens to people.
    He talks to people.
    He talks about people.
    I look at photograghs.
    I look for things to film.
    I  wait for opportunities.

  It's important to listen . people. ...  It's important to listen to people
  He talked ... his problems at work. ... He talked about his problems at work.
  Please don't laugh ...me.Please don't laugh at me.
  I pay attention ... setails.I pay attention to details.
  You should watch. .  . mistakes.  You should watch for mistakes.
  I look back. . . my childhood  with pleasure。    I look back on my childhood  with pleasure.

3、学习简单句子:

    I'd like to speak to you.
    Please look at it.
    Tell me what you think about it.
    I'll type it over.
    You looked it up.
    Throw it away.

4、either  verb and preposition or  two-word verb. direct object 
    Correct  and incorrect to correctly

    Please look at this paper.  Correct.   
    You should type over it.    You should type it over.
    Do you want to talk her to now?  Do you want to talk to her now?
  Throwaway it !    Throw it away !
  May I please speak to Professor  Wong?   
  Correct.   
    There's a mistake here. Cross out  it.    There's a mistake here. Cross it  out.   

5、 ask  opinion, either answer is correct because you're giving  your opinion:

Jake, what did you think of  my story?    Well, I thought it was  remarkable.

What did you think of the last movie you saw? Did you think it  was boring or impressive? 
I thought it was impressive.    I thought it was boring. 
How did you like the last party  you went to? In your opinion, was it marvelous or terrible?
  In my opinion, it was marvelous.    In my opinion, it was terrible.

  How did you like the last party  you went to? In your opinion,  was it marvelous or terrible?
What do you think of Chris's  story about spring fever? Do you  think it's excellent or  embarrassing?
  How do you like murder  mysteries? In your opinion, are they interesting or silly?
  How do you like modem  furniture? In your opinion, is  most of it marvelous or awful?
  How was your last vacation? Did  you think it was fantastic or  boring?

    And in my opinion, that's  enough for this lesson

三、场景学习--过去式提问问题及回答:

1、引导语:

    This  is Lesson Einght. You're going  to practice asking  questions  using  the simple past  tence. First, lisen to these two  question and thire answers.

2、问答:

  Did Chris show her interview tape to Jake?  Yes, she did.
  What did Jeke say about the  interview?  He said it was interesting.

3、引导语:

  Now you're going to hear some  statements. Use each statements  to make either a Yes/ on  or a  WH-question using the simple  past tence. For example,you hear...

4、引导学习:

  Yes. Chris showed her interview  tape to Jake.  And you say... Did Chris show her interview  tape to Jake? And you hear... He said it was interview. And you say... What did he say about it?  All right? Let's begin.

5、提问练习:

  Yes. Chris showed her interview  tape ti Jake.  Did Chris shoe her interview  tape to Jake?
  He said it was interview.  What did he say about it?
    Yes. Mike talked about his interview. Did he talk about his interview?
  Mike said he lived his job.  What did Mike said he loved his job?
  He said he paid attention to details.  What did he say he paid attention to?
  Yes. He talking to Cheis about  the technical problems.Did he talk to Chris about the technical problems?
  He said it was impotant  listen carefully.  What did he say it was impotant  to do?

四、场景学习--麦克的工作经验:

1、引导语:

Now let's listen to Mike as he  talks about to Mike as he talks about his experices  working at WEFL.

2、情景:

    I've been working at WEFL  fow many years now. I live my  job. When I look bach on  those years, I miss some of the people I used to work with. It  can get crazy hear sometimes,  but I don't pay any attention.  I just  laugh at people who take themselves too seriously.  It's important to listen to  people and what they have to  say. That's probably why I've  been  able to stay here so long.  I pay attention to details, and  I keep a sence of humor about  my job.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

    I look back on those years.
      I look banck on those years.
      I laugh at those people.
      I laugh at those people.
      I pay attention to details.
    I pay attention to details.

    He listens to people.
    He listens to people.
    He talks about people.
    He talks about people.

    I look at photograghs.
    I look at photographs.
    I look for  things to film.
    I look for things to film.
  I wait for opportunities.
    I  wait for opportunities.

4、引导语:

  Notice how some verbs can be  used with more than one  preposition: for example, talk to  and talk about, look at and look for. Now you're going to hear  some sentences with a verb that  should be followed  by a preposition. When you hear the sentense, the proposition will be  missing. Repeat the sentence,  putting in the correct  proposition.  For example, you hear...

5、引导学习:

  It's important to listen ... people. And you say...  It's important to listen to people..You hear...  He talked ... his problems at work. And you say... He talked about his problems at work. OK? Let's begin.

6、练习:

  It's improtant to listen ... people. It's improtant to listen to people.
  He talked ... his problems at work.  He talked about his problems at work.
  Please don't laugh ...me.Please don't laugh at me.
  I pay attention ... setails.I pay attention to details.
    You should watch. .  . mistakes.  You should watch for mistakes.
    I look back. . . my childhood  with pleasure。    I look back on my childhood  with pleasure.

五、场景学习 --师生对话 :

1、引导语:
  Now listen as we hear two people a student and her teacher  discussing a report the student is  having trouble with.

2、情景:

  Professor Wong, I'd like to speak  to you. Certainly, Julie. Can I help you  with something? Would you please look at this  paper I'm writing? It would help me if you would tell me what you  think about it before I type it  over. Sure, I'll look at it. Hmmm. Are  you sure about the information you have here? I looked it up in my books. It looks all wrong to me. I'm  sorry, but this paper will have to  be done again. I think you'd  better throw it away.

3、学习:

  Now listen and repeat.

    I'd like to speak to you.
    I'd like to speak to you.
    Please look at it.
    Please look at it.
    Tell me what you think about it.
    Tell me what you think about it.
    I'll type it over.
    I'll type it over.

  You looked it up.
    You looked it up.
    Throw it away.
    Throw it away.

六、场景学习---双动词中间加方向词的表达方式判断正误:
sentence  that uses either a verb and a preposition or a two-word verb.

1、引导语:

  Notice that when we use a verb    and a preposition, like look at  or speak to, we put the direct object  last. We say "look at it" and  "speak to Professor Wong."  When we use a two-word verb,  we put the direct-object pronoun  in the middle. We say "look it up" and "type it over." Now  you're going to hear a sentence  that uses either a verb and a preposition or a two-word verb.  If the sentence you hear is  correct, say "Correct." If it is incorrect, say the sentence  correctly. For example, you hear.. .

2、引导学习:

    Please look at this paper.    And you say . . .  Correct.      You hear. . .    You should type over it.    And you say . . .  You should type it over.    OK? Let's begin.
 
3、练习:

  Please look at this paper.  Correct.   
    You should type over it.    You should type it over.
    Do you want to talk her to now?  Do you want to talk to her now?
  Throwaway it !    Throw it away !
  May I please speak to Professor  Wong?    Correct.   
    There's a mistake here. Cross out  it.    There's a mistake here. Cross it  out.     

七、场景学习---询问对方看法:

1、引导语:
 
  To end this lesson, listen to Chris and Jake as Chris asks Jake  for his opinion.

2、情景:

  Jake, what did you think of  my story?    Well, I thought it was  remarkable.

3、引导学习:

  When Jake gave his opinion, he  started by saying "I thought." Of course, he could also have  said.. .  In my opinion, it was remarkable.   

4、引导语:

    Now you're going to give your opinion of different things. To help you improve your  vocabulary, the person who asks  you for your opinion will give  you two adjectives to choose  from. You choose one of the  two. For example, you hear . . .

5、引导学习:

  What did you think of the last movie you saw? Did you think it  was boring or impressive?    And you say . . . I thought it was impressive.  Or you can say. . .  I thought it was boring.  You hear. . . How did you like the last party  you went to? In your opinion, was it marvelous or terrible?  And you say . . .    In my opinion, it was marvelous.  Or you can say. . .  In my opinion, it was terrible.

  Remember, either answer is correct because you're giving  your opinion. OK, let's begin.

6、练习:

  What did you think of the last  movie you saw? Did you think it  was boring or impressive?
  How did you like the last party  you went to? In your opinion,  was it marvelous or terrible?
    What do you think of Chris's  story about spring fever? Do you  think it's excellent or  embarrassing?
  How do you like murder  mysteries? In your opinion, are they interesting or silly?
  How do you like modem  furniture? In your opinion, is  most of it marvelous or awful?
  How was your last vacation? Did  you think it was fantastic or  boring?

    And in my opinion, that's  enough for this lesson. This is the  end of Lesson Eight.


sunyuting1 2007-10-27 16:23
第十册复习三

一、基本词组:

1、so  adjective that 。。。

was so messy  that
was so interesting that

was so thirsty  that
was so fat  that
was so upset  that
was so silly  that
so sorry for Jack  that
so that

2、important  information ask and answer  questions

Where is located
What dates
What are prices
for what people
How much do pay for
What time do
On what days are
During what hours is
What days of the week is

二、基本句子:

1、so  adjective that 句式:

Mike was thirsty. He drank three  glasses of water.    Mike was so thirsty that he drank  three glasses of water.
  Jack was fat. He couldn't get  through the door.    Jack was so fat that he couldn't get through the door.
  Mary was upset. She knocked  over a chair.      Mary was so upset that she  knocked over a chair.
    The story was silly. I couldn't  help laughing at it.  The story was so silly that I couldn't help laughing at it.
    Jill felt sorry for Jack. She tried  to encourage him.  Jill felt so sorry for Jack that she  tried to encourage him.

2、听懂海报信息

Hello. This is the City Theater,  located at 315 Kennedy Avenue.  For one week only, from June  10th through June 16th, we will  be perfonning William  Shakespeare's Hamlet. Ticket  prices are $25, $20, and $15. A  limited number of tickets are  available at half price for  students on the day  of the  performance. Evening performances start at 8:00 P.M. Tuesday through Saturday.  Matinees begin at 3:00 P.M. on Wednesday and Saturday. The box office is open from 1 0:00  A.M. to 8:00 P.M. from Monday to Saturday. Thank you for calling the City Theater.

3、听懂信息记忆问答检验句子练习:

  Question One.    Where is the City Theater  located?  At 315 Kennedy Avenue.
  Question Two.  What dates is William.  Shakespeare's Hamlet being  performed?From June 10th through June 16th.
  Question Three.  What are the ticket prices?  $25, $20, and $15.
  Question Four.    A limited number of tickets are available for what group of  people on the day of the  performance?    For students.
    Question Five.    How much do students have to  pay for their tickets on the day of  the performance?  Half price.
    Question Six.  What time do the evening  performances start from Tuesday  through Saturday?    At 8:00 P.M.
  Question Seven.    What time do the matinees start?  At 3:00 P.M.
  Question Eight.  On what days are matinee performances given?    On Wednesday and Saturday.
  Question Nine.    During what hours is the box  office open?  From 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M.
  Question Ten.  What days of the week is the box  office open?  Monday to Saturday.



三、场景学习--编辑室的故事:

  1、引导语:

    Review Three.  Listen to these sentences.

  2、情景--编辑室:

  The editing room was messy. Jake couldn't find his tape.    The editing room was so messy  that Jake couldn't find his tape.  Chris thought spring romance  was interesting. She did a story  about it.  Chris thought spring romance  was so interesting that she did a  story about it.

3、引导语---导致结果表达式复合句so。。。that。。。 

so adjective that  to  introduce a result clause,like so messy  that or so interesting that  :

    Notice how we use so plus an adjective and that, like so messy  that or so interesting that, to  introduce a result clause. Now  you're going to hear two sentences. Add the second  sentence to the first one by  joining them with so plus an  adjective and that. For example,  you hear . . .

4、引导学习---that 连接两个简单句为复杂句:

  Mike was thirsty. He drank three  glasses of water.    And you say. . .    Mike was so thirsty that he drank  three glasses of water.  Or you hear. . .    Jack was fat. He couldn't get  through the door.  And you say. . .  Jack was so fat that he couldn't  get through the door.  All right. Let's begin.

5、练习---复合句子:

  Mike was thirsty. He drank three  glasses of water.    Mike was so thirsty that he drank  three glasses of water.
  Jack was fat. He couldn't get  through the door.    Jack was so fat that he couldn't get through the door.
  Mary was upset. She knocked  over a chair.      Mary was so upset that she  knocked over a chair.
    The story was silly. I couldn't  help laughing at it.  The story was so silly that I couldn't help laughing at it.
    Jill felt sorry for Jack. She tried  to encourage him.  Jill felt so sorry for Jack that she  tried to encourage him.
 
四、场景学习---听读戏院音乐会海报信息:

1、引导语--想象情景为阅读听戏院报纸:

  Now imagine this situation. You  have read in the newspaper that Shakespeare's play, Hamlet, is  going to be presented at a theater in your city. When you call the  theater, you hear the following  recorded announcement. Listen.

  2、情景---戏院海报一周演出信息:
    Hello. This is the City Theater,  located at 315 Kennedy Avenue.  For one week only, from June  10th through June 16th, we will  be perfonning William  Shakespeare's Hamlet. Ticket  prices are $25, $20, and $15. A  limited number of tickets are  available at half price for  students on the day  of the  performance. Evening performances start at 8:00 P.M. Tuesday through Saturday.  Matinees begin at 3:00 P.M. on Wednesday and Saturday. The box office is open from 1 0:00  A.M. to 8:00 P.M. from Monday to Saturday. Thank you for calling the City Theater.

3、引导语---记忆关键信息的方法:

    Now take your pencil and a piece  of paper. You're going to hear  the same recorded  announcement, but this time  there will be a pause after each  group of words so that you can  write down some of what you  heard. Don't write every word,  just the important information.  All ready? Let's begin.

4、重复慢放情景信息:距离、日期、内容、价格、优惠、时间、类型

    Hello. This is the City Theater, located at 315 Kennedy Avenue.  For one week only, from June    10th through June 16th,  we will be perfonning William  Shakespeare's Hamlet.  Ticket prices are $25, $20, and  $15.  A limited number of tickets are  available at half price for  students on the day of the  performance.  Evening performances start at  8:00 P.M. Tuesday through  Saturday.  Matinees begin at 3 :00 P.M. on  Wednesday and Saturday.  The box office is open from  10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. from  Monday to Saturday. Thank you for calling the City  Theater.

5、引导语--回答问题信息:

  Now use your paper to answer  these ten questions. Give short  answers. Ready? Let's begin.

6、信息记忆问答练习

  Question One.    Where is the City Theater  located?  At 315 Kennedy Avenue.
  Question Two.  What dates is William.  Shakespeare's Hamlet being  performed?From June 10th through June 16th.
  Question Three.  What are the ticket prices?  $25, $20, and $15.
  Question Four.    A limited number of tickets are available for what group of  people on the day of the  performance?    For students.
    Question Five.    How much do students have to  pay for their tickets on the day of  the performance?  Half price.
    Question Six.  What time do the evening  performances start from Tuesday  through Saturday?    At 8:00 P.M.
  Question Seven.    What time do the matinees start?  At 3:00 P.M.
  Question Eight.  On what days are matinee performances given?    On Wednesday and Saturday.
  Question Nine.    During what hours is the box  office open?  From 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M.
  Question Ten.  What days of the week is the box  office open?  Monday to Saturday.

7、引导语---方法学习:

  Now you're going to have a very  short dictation about concerts in Britain. Don't write anything.  Just listen.

    You can listen to music all over Britain. Classical, folk, rock, and  jazz music can be heard  everywhere in the country.  Watch for special concert  announcements in the  newspapers.

    Now take your pencil and a piece  of paper. You'll hear the  dictation again, but this time there will be a pause after each group of words. Write down  exactly what you hear. All ready?  Let's begin.

8、学习----连环压码、多重压码和压码多个句子、压码长句子听懂回想信息:
  You can listen to music  allover Britain.
  Classical, folk, rock, and jazz  music
  can be heard everywhere  in the country.
  Watch for special concert announcements  in the newspapers.

  Now listen as the dictation is  read for the last time. Look at  your paper and correct any  mistakes you find. Ready? Listen.

  You can listen to music all over  Britain. Classical, folk, rock, and  jazz music can be heard everywhere in the country.  Watch for special concert  announcements in the  newspapers.

9、引导语---简单回答问题:

  Now use your paper to answer  the following questions. Give short answers. OK, let's begin.

10、信息记忆问答练习:

  Question One.' Where can you listen to music?    All over Britain.
  Question Two.  What four types of music are  mentioned in this report?    Classical, folk, rock, and jazz.
  Question Three.  Where can these four types of  music be heard?  Everywhere in the country.
  Question Four.    Where should people watch for  special concert announcements?    In the newspapers.

  This is the end of Review Three.
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 108 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-10-28 21:19
第十册第九课

一、基本词组
1、public opinion  polls:

percent
percent of the  people think
don't think that
agree with his way
disagree with
Only  ....say he'll 
about what

percentage of
shows that 
figure out
agree with  the idea that
don't think that
2、
Please type it up.
want you to
run them off.
have to
clean it up.
throw them away
Cross it
out right away.
  You should
type it over.
put them away.
  will fill it in.
  it will print it out.
3、
  fortnight.-two weeks.

  flat --apartment
  cooker --stove
 fridge--.refrigerator.
  lift --elevator .
  ring up --call up   
   goodbye.-- cheerio!

二、基本句子:

1、支持率

Fifty-three percent of the  American people think the  President is doing a good job.
  Forty-seven percent think he's  doing a bad job.
  Forty-one percent agree with his way of dealing with the economy, and fifty-nine percent disagree with it.
  Only twelve percent say he'll improve education, and eighty-eight percent say he won't.

2、反对率

Seventy-five percent of the  people think he's doing a good  job.   
    Twr:n(y-fivc pcrr-cnl" of the  people think he's doing a bad  job.   
    Ninety-five percent of the people think he'll help the economy.
    Five percent of the people think he'll hurt the economy.
  Eighty percent of the people agree with his plan.
  Twenty percent disagree with his  plan.   
    Ten percent think he' ll  lose the next election.   
    Ninety percent think he'll win  the next election.   
  Thirty-five percent agree with  the idea that this country will soon have a war.   
    Sixty-five percent disagree with  the idea that this country will soon have a war.   
  One percent of the people think  that the U.S. will have a king in  the future.   
  Ninety-nine percent of the  people don't think that the U.S.  will have a king in the future.

3、 两动词之家加上指示代词用法的句子变换

Please type up this letter.    Please type it up.
  I want you to run the copies off.  I want you to run them off.
    You have to clean up this room.  You have to clean it up.
  You have to throw these papers away.    You have to throw them away.
  Please point out my mistakes to me.  Please point them out  to me.
  Cross the mistake out right away.  Cross it out right away.
  You should type this paper over.  You should type it over.
  Please put away your pencils,  Please put them away.
  The computer will fill in the  correct spelling.  The computer will fill it in.
  Then it will print out a page.    Then it will print it out.

4、 同音单词拼写句子

    I love the peace and quiet of the  country. Peace.  Peace . . . p - e - a - c - e.
   May I have a piece of your cake?  Piece. Piece... p - i - e - c - e.
   Our team won the game. Won.    Won... w-o-n.
   We beat the other team by one point. One.  One... o-n-e.
   Why don't we meet for lunch? Meet.  Meet... m-e-e-t.
   Why don't we have meat for lunch? Meat.  Meat... m-e-a-t.
   Mrs. Velez wrote to her son. Son.  Son... s - 0 - n.
   The sun is very hot today. Sun. Sun... s-u-n.

5、美语与英语单词用法的区别:

        I'll be staying in Stamford for a  fortnight. I'll be staying in Stamford for two weeks.
   I'm living in a flat near the park. F: I'm living in an apartment near the park.
   There's a small cooker in the kitchen.  There's a small stove in the kitchen.
   Right next to it is a large fridge.   Right next to it is a large refrigerator.
   There's no lift in my building.  There's no elevator in my building.
   I must ring up Susan before I go.   I must call up Susan before I go.
  
   And now that you've finished this lesson, it's time to say goodbye. Or, as they say in Britain, cheerio!

三、场景学习--美国最近民意调查新闻报道:

1、引导语results of some recent public opinion  polls:

  Welcome to Lesson Nine.  Listen to this news report. It's  going to tell you about the results of some recent public opinion  polls in the United States. Let's  listen.

2、情景---美国总统民意调查支持率节目:

  Good evening. A recent  WEFL Stamford Gazette poll shows that  fifty-three percent of the  American people think the  President is doing a good job.  Forty-seven percent think he's  doing a bad job. Forty-one  percent agree with his way of  dealing with the economy and  fifty-nine percent disagree with  it. Only twelve percent say he'll  improve education, and eighty- eight percent say he won't.

3、压码学习:

    Now listen and repeat.

    fifty-three percent of the  American people

  think the President is doing

  a good job

  Fifty-three percent of the American people think the President is doing a good job.

  Fifty-three percent of the  American people think the  President is doing a good job.

  forty-seven percent think he's  doing

  a bad job

  Forty-seven percent think he's  doing a bad job.

  Forty-seven percent think he's  doing a bad job.


    forty-one percent agree with his  way

  of dealing with the economy

  and fifty-nine percent

  disagree with it

  Forty-one percent agree with his way of dealing with the economy, and fifty-nine percent disagree with it.

  Forty-one percent agree with his  way of dealing with the  economy, and fifty-nine percent  disagree with it.


    only twelve percent say

  he'll improve education

  and eighty-eight percent say he won't

  Only twelve percent say he'll improve education, and eighty-  eight percent say he won't.

  Only twelve percent say he'll improve education, and eighty-eight percent say he won't.

  四、场景学习---推论反对率:

 1、引导语---从支持率理解反对率:

        Now you're going to hear a  statement about what percent of  the public thinks a certain way.  You figure out the percentage of the public that feels the opposite  way and say it. For example, you  hear.. .   

 2、引导学习:

  Seventy-five percent of the  people think he's doing a good  job.  And you say. . .Twenty-five percent of the  people think he's doing a bad  job.  Or you hear. . . Ninety-five percent of the people  think he'll help the economy.  And you say. . .  Five percent of the people think  he'll hurt the economy.  All right? Let's begin.

 3、练习:

    Seventy-five percent of the  people think he's doing a good  job.   
    Twenty -five percent  of the  people think he's doing a bad  job.   
    Ninety-five percent of the people think he'll help the economy.
    Five percent of the people think he'll hurt the economy.
  Eighty percent of the people agree with his plan.
  Twenty percent disagree with his  plan.   
    Ten percent think he' ll  lose the next election.   
    Ninety percent think he'll win  the next election.   
  Thirty-five percent agree with  the idea that this country will soon have a war.   
    Sixty-five percent disagree with  the idea that this country will soon have a war.   
  One percent of the people think  that the U.S. will have a king in  the future.   
  Ninety-nine percent of the  people don't think that the U.S.  will have a king in the future.

 五、场景学习---句子表达方式的变换:
 
 1、引导语---两个动词之间加上指示代词的用法:

  Now let's practice using some two-word verbs with direct- object pronouns. You're going to  hear a sentence using a noun as  an object pronoun, and you  repeat it using a pronoun in place of the noun. For example,

 2、引导学习:

  you hear . . .  Please type up this letter.  And you say. . .  Please type it up.  Or you hear. . .    I want you to run the copies off.    And you say. . .  I want you to run them off.  All right? Let's begin.

 3、句子变换练习:

    Please type up this letter.    Please type it up.
  I want you to run the copies off.  I want you to run them off.
    You have to clean up this room.  You have to clean it up.
  You have to throw these papers away.    You have to throw them away.
  Please point out my mistakes to me.  Please point them out  to me.
  Cross the mistake out right away.  Cross it out right away.
  You should type this paper over.  You should type it over.
  Please put away your pencils,  Please put them away.
  The computer will fill in the  correct spelling.  The computer will fill it in.
  Then it will print out a page.    Then it will print it out.

 六、场景学习---同音不同词的用法:

 1、引导语--homonyms:

  Now let's practice some more homonyms. You will hear two  sentences. Each one contains a  homonym, like peace, spelled  p - e - a - c - e, and piece, spelled  p - i - e - c - e. After you hear  each sentence, say the homonym and spell it. For example, you  hear.. .

 2、引导学习:

  I love the peace and quiet of the country. Peace.  And you say . . . Peace . . . p - e - a - c - e. Or you hear. . .    May I have a piece of your cake?  Piece.  And you say. . .  Piece. . . p - i - e - c - e.  Ready? Let's begin.

 3、同音单词拼写句子练习:

  I love the peace and quiet of the  country. Peace.  Peace . . . p - e - a - c - e.
     May I have a piece of your cake?  Piece. Piece... p - i - e - c - e.
   Our team won the game. Won.    Won... w-o-n.
   We beat the other team by one point. One.  One... o-n-e.
   Why don't we meet for lunch? Meet.  Meet... m-e-e-t.
   Why don't we have meat for lunch? Meat.  Meat... m-e-a-t.
   Mrs. Velez wrote to her son. Son.  Son... s - 0 - n.
   The sun is very hot today. Sun. Sun... s-u-n.

 七、场景学习--美语与英语单词用法的区别:

 1、引导语:

  Now, to end this lesson, let's see if you remember what words are used in the United States in place of certain British words. For example, you hear a sentence with a British word, like this. . .

 2、引导学习:

  I'll be staying in Stamford for a fortnight.And you say . . .I'll be staying in Stamford for  two weeks. Or you hear. . . I'm living in a flat near the park.  And you say . .  .I'm living in an apartment near  the park. All right, let's begin.

 3、练习:

   I'll be staying in Stamford for a  fortnight. I'll be staying in Stamford for two weeks.
   I'm living in a flat near the park. F: I'm living in an apartment near the park.
   There's a small cooker in the kitchen.  There's a small stove in the kitchen.
   Right next to it is a large fridge.   Right next to it is a large refrigerator.
   There's no lift in my building.  There's no elevator in my building.
   I must ring up Susan before I go.   I must call up Susan before I go.
  
   And now that you've finished this lesson, it's time to say goodbye. Or, as they say in Britain, cheerio! And that's the end of Lesson Nine.


sunyuting1 2007-10-28 22:16
第十册第十课

一、基本词组:
1、
past tense of the verb break:
Broke.
To be broke
to be without money
worried about 。。。and that of 。。。
Look it over and tell me
what you think
It's that
When we say 。。。, we mean that 。。。
he or she doesn't have
They're arguing about who is 。。。
who have 。。and those who don't have 。。。.
Who's broke?
  Who isn't broke?
I can't
Can you

leave the tip
need it for
Why don't you ask
In fact

2、
trying to 
decides to 
find out 
what's going on.
handing out
These aren't
I think so too
I've  called up
handing out
will be asking
You'll be here, 
won't you
I'll be working

I probably
Will you be
  I'll be working
as late as
I  have to.
I'll be waiting
  Won't you be
No. I don't think so.
But I'll have
    I probably won't be
  Won't Detective Modine be
  He might, but I'll be 

3、
  Does Steven have
I don't know. Maybe 。。
  Are you working at
  Not today
But I'll be working at 
Is Raymond Modine asking
But he'll be asking
Are Rita and Terry
But they'll be
But she'll be 

4、Will you be coming in
      Will you be working
    Will you be interviewing
    Will you be seeing
    Will you be having lunch
    Will you be going
    Will you be studying

    I probably won't be


二、基本句子:
1、Peter Case will be broke in a month.
2、Who's broke? Who isn't broke?

    Does Steven have any money?. . .No, he doesn't. He's broke.
      Does Rita have any money. Yes, she does. She isn't broke.
      Does Chris have any money?
      I don't know. Maybe she's broke; maybe she isn't broke.

3、Raymond Modine will be asking a lot of questions.
      I'll be working at the Nature  Center tomorrow.

      Are you working at the Nature  Center today?    Not today. But I'll be working at  the Nature Center  tomorrow.
  Is Raymond Modine asking a lot  of questions today?  Not today. But he'll be asking a  lot of questions tomorrow.
  Is Steven's secretary handing out a letter to everyone today?  Not today. But she'll be handing  out a letter to everyone tomorrow. 
  Is Mike talking to Detective Modine today?            Not today. But he'll be talking to  Detective Modine tomorrow.
  Are Rita and Terry going out for  lunch today?    Not today. But they'll be going out for lunch tomorrow.
  Are you coming to the office  today?      Not today. But I'll be coming to  the office tomorrow.
  Is Chris interviewing Terry today?    Not today. But she'll be  interviewing Terry tomorrow.


4、Will you be coming in early  tomorrow?  I probably won't be coming in at  all tomorrow.
  Will you be working late  tonight?  I probably won't be working at all tonight.
  Will you be interviewing Terry at two 0' clock on Tuesday?  I probably won't be interviewing Terry  at all on Tuesday.
  Will you be seeing James later  this evening?  I probably won't be seeing James at all this evening.
  Will you be having lunch early  this afternoon?  I probably won't be having lunch at all this afternoon.
  Will you be going to the studio at ten 0' clock tomorrow  morning?  I probably won't be going to the  studio at all tomorrow morning.
  Will you be studying English late Saturday night?  I probably won't be studying  English at all Saturday night.


三、场景学习---斯蒂文对电视台的担忧

 1、引导语--- past tense of the verb break:
  Welcome to Lesson Ten. For this lesson, you'll need a pencil and a piece of paper.Steven is talking to Jake in his office. He's worried about the future of WEFL and that of the owner, Peter Case. Listen to the conversation. Listen in particular for the past tense of the verb break.

  2、情景----电视台糟糕的情景:

  Look it over and tell me what you think . . .  We're losing viewers. Our owner, Peter Case, will  be broke in a month, Jake.  Is the situation that bad?  It's that bad. Peter Case will have to sell the station.

3、学习break--- Broke.:

  What is the past tense of break? That's right. Broke.

  Now listen and repeat.

broke
Peter Case will be broke
Peter Case will be broke in a month.
Peter Case will be broke in a month.

四、场景学习---电视台人员吃晚饭后无钱付账的情景:

1、引导语To be broke means "to be without money." :

    To be broke means "to be without money." When we say someone is broke, we mean that he or she doesn't have any money. Jake, Rita, and Mike have just finished lunch at a restaurant near the station. They're arguing about who is going to leave the tip for the waiter. Listen to the conversation. Take a piece of paper and a pencil and write a list of those who have some money and those who don't have any money. Who's broke? Who isn't broke? You will hear the dialogue twice.

2、情景对话---.Who's broke? Who isn't broke? :

      Come on, Mike. It's your turn to leave the tip. Sorry, Rita. I can't leave a tip today. I only have four dollars. It's not enough. How about you, Jake?  OK, OK. I'll leave the tip. But I don't have any money. Can you give me ten dollars, Rita? I'll pay you back tomorrow.  Sorry, Jake. I only have five dollars,  and I need it for gas. Maybe Steven has some money he can give you. He's over there. Why don't you ask him?  No. Steven asked me for a dollar this morning for coffee. He doesn't have a penny. In fact, he also asked Terry for money, and we all know Terry's broke. Yeah. Terry spent all his money on Rita last night. Oh, you. . . be quiet. You guys are just jealous.

3、重复:
  Now listen to the conversation  again to check your list.

      Come on, Mike. It's your turn  to leave the tip. Sorry, Rita. I can't leave a tip today. I only have four dollars. It's not enough. How about you, Jake?  OK, OK. I'll leave the tip. But I don't have any money. Can you give me ten dollars, Rita? I'll pay you back tomorrow.  Sorry, Jake. I only have five dollars,  and I need it for gas. Maybe Steven has some money he can give you. He's over there. Why don't you ask him?  No. Steven asked me for a dollar this morning for coffee. He doesn't have a penny.    In fact, he also asked Terry for money, and we all know Terry's broke. Yeah. Terry spent all his money on Rita last night. Oh, you. . . be quiet. You  guys are just jealous.

4、引导学习:

  OK. Now you hear. . . Does Steven have any money?  And you say. . .No, he doesn't. He's broke. You hear. . . Does Rita have any money.And you say. . .Yes, she does. She isn't broke.You hear. . . Does Chris have any money? And you say. . . I don't know. Maybe she's broke; maybe she isn't broke. OK? Here we go.

5、练习信息理解记忆who  have any money or  broke:

  Does Steven have any money?  No, he doesn't. He's broke.
  Does Rita have any money?    Yes, she does. She isn't broke.
  Does Chris have any money?  I don't know. Maybe she's broke; maybe she isn't broke.
  Does Mike have any money?  Yes, he does. He isn't broke.
  Does Jake have any money?  No, he doesn't. He's broke.
  Does Terry have any money?  No, he doesn't. He's broke.
  Does Roger have any money?  I don't know. Maybe he's broke;  maybe he isn't broke.

五、场景学习---侦探摩登:

1、引导语--斯蒂文与杰克关于摩登的对话:
            Someone is deliberately trying to  hurt WEFL. Steven decides to  hire a detective to find out  what's going on. Listen to the  conversation between Steven  and Jake. Listen carefully for the detective's name.

  2、情景:

Technical difficulties !  These aren't technical difficulties. Someone is  deliberately trying to hurt us. I think so too, Jake. I've  called up a detective.  His name is Raymond Modine and he'll be coming    in  tomorrow. My secretary will be handing out a letter to  everyone at the station, explaining the situation.  Is that a good idea?  Raymond Modine will be asking a lot of questions tomorrow.    You'll be here,  won't you?  I'll be working at the  Nature Center in the morning.

  3、学习:

    OK. What's the detective's  name?  Raymond Modine.

  Now listen and repeat.

  a lot of questions
  Raymond Modine will be asking  a lot of questions.
  Raymond Modine will be asking a lot of questions.

  at the Nature Center
  I'll be working at the Nature  Center
  I'll be working at the Nature  Center tomorrow.
  I'll be working at the Nature  Center tomorrow.

  4、引导学习:

:  Now you hear. .  Are you working at the Nature  Center today?  And you say. . .  Not today. But I'll be working at  the Nature Center tomorrow.  You hear. . .    Is Raymond Modine asking a lot of questions today?  And you say. . .  Not today. But he'll be asking a  lot of questions tomorrow.  Ready?  Let's go.

  5、练习Are you 、is he、is she提问和  Not today. But I'll be 回答计划的句子:

  Are you working at the Nature  Center today?    Not today. But I'll be working at  the Nature Center  tomorrow.
  Is Raymond Modine asking a lot  of questions today?  Not today. But he'll be asking a  lot of questions tomorrow.
  Is Steven's secretary handing out a letter to everyone today?  Not today. But she'll be handing  out a letter to everyone tomorrow. 
  Is Mike talking to Detective Modine today?            Not today. But he'll be talking to  Detective Modine tomorrow.
  Are Rita and Terry going out for  lunch today?    Not today. But they'll be going out for lunch tomorrow.
  Are you coming to the office  today?      Not today. But I'll be coming to  the office tomorrow.
  Is Chris interviewing Terry today?    Not today. But she'll be  interviewing Terry tomorrow.

六、场景学习---提问和告诉计划:

1、引导语---Who will be :

    Good. Jake and Chris are  talking. Chris is planning her  interviews with Steven and Peter Case. Listen to the conversation.  Who will be looking for Jake  tomorrow? 

  2、情景---计划 Will you be 、won't be :

    Will you be working late?  I'll be working as late as I  have to. And I'll be waiting  for you.    Why?    Won't you be staying late  tonight? No. I don't think so.  But I'll have a lot of  interviews for you to        see. Will you be coming in early tomorrow?    I probably won't be coming  in at all tomorrow.  Won't Detective Modine be  looking for you?  He might, but I'll be  interviewing someone at the Nature Center.
 
  3、压码学习:

  Who will be looking for Jake  tomorrow?  Detective Modine.

  Now listen and repeat.

  early tomorrow
  Will you be coming in early  tomorrow?
  Will you be coming in early  tomorrow?

  I won't be coming in
  I probably won't be coming in
  I probably won't be coming in at  all
  I probably won't be coming in at  all tomorrow.
  I probably won't be coming in at  all tomorrow.

    4、引导学习:

        Now you hear. . .  Will you be coming in early  tomorrow?  And you say. . .  I probably won't be coming in at  all tomorrow.  You hear. . .  Will you be working late tonight?  And you say. . I probably won't be working at  all tonight.  OK? Let's begin.

  5、练习 Will you be 提问和I probably won't be 计划的句子:

  Will you be coming in early  tomorrow?  I probably won't be coming in at  all tomorrow.
  Will you be working late  tonight?  I probably won't be working at all tonight.
  Will you be interviewing Terry at two 0' clock on Tuesday?  I probably won't be interviewing Terry  at all on Tuesday.
  Will you be seeing James later  this evening?  I probably won't be seeing James at all this evening.
  Will you be having lunch early  this afternoon?  I probably won't be having lunch at all this afternoon.
  Will you be going to the studio at ten 0' clock tomorrow  morning?  I probably won't be going to the  studio at all tomorrow morning.
  Will you be studying English late Saturday night?  I probably won't be studying  English at all Saturday night.

    OK. That's all. This is the end of  Lesson Ten.
级别: 管理员
只看该作者 109 发表于: 2009-02-09
sunyuting1 2007-10-28 23:20
第十册第十一课

一、基本词组:
What were you ... while I  was
When I was..., I wanted to 
But I still don't  know what ...with ...
How old was ... when  ...

I was looking for
while I was looking for
what were you doing
I look for

  You do
  What were you doing while I was   
  You think
  I talk to
  What were you thinking
  while I  was talking to
  They look for .
  What were they looking for
  while you were
    What were you singing
    They talk about.
    What were they talking about 
  while they were
  You wonder.
  What were you wondering
  while  we were interviewing
  You dream about. .
    What were you dreaming about 
    while you were sleeping

Do  you know what
Did you know that ...was ...
  You don't know what
  I think.   
  Why don't you
  If you asked for
  they'd think you
  isn't it
I think
I say,
have you got 
I've got
I mean, do you know what
  Who says
How do ...say ...
Have you got where ...

Have you got any
  Do you have any
  Do you have
  Have you got

You'll need to
You'll need it for
I know how  to ...in
How did you get on
Have you got
Please don't
I haven't got any ....
And  I'm not going on ...
because I haven't got
I haven't got any .. either.

A barrister 。。。 sort of lawyer
train station . . . Railway station. 

  Parcel. ---Package.
  Mail a package.---Post a parcel.
Mailbox.---Letter box
holiday ---vacation


二、基本句子:
  What were you doing while I was  looking for the love of my life?

You do  . . . I look for the love of my  life.        What were you doing while I was looking for the love of my  life?
    You think. . . I talk to Mike.  What were you thinking while I  was talking to Mike?
    They look for . . . you watch the  tape.  What were they looking for while you were watching the      tape?   
  You sing. . . you work.    What were you singing while you  were working?   
  They talk about. . . they eat  lunch.      What were they talking about  while they were eating lunch?
  You wonder. . . we interview  James Morgan.      What were you wondering while  we were interviewing James Morgan?   
  You dream about. . . you sleep.    What were you dreaming about  while you were sleeping?

Have you got any change?    Do you have any change?
  Do you have a cigarette?    Have you got a cigarette?
    Do you have a light?  Have you got a light?
  Have you got any pets?  Do you have any pets?
  Have you got a minute?    Do you have a minute?
  Do you have a kiss for me?    Have you got a kiss for me?


  Post a small parcel in a letter box.   
  package mail a small package in a mailbox
  Mail a small package in a mailbox.
  go on holiday   
  go on vacation 


三、场景学习---瑞塔想嫁给英国人但是嫁给了美国人:

1、引导语----how old Rita was when she  wanted to marry an Englishman:

Welcome to Lesson Eleven.  Rita and Terry are having a  picnic. Listen to the  conversation. Listen carefully for how old Rita was when she  wanted to marry an Englishman.

2、情景----瑞塔不知道她退休后的爱情生活怎么过:

  What were you doing while I  was looking for the love of  my life?  I was looking for you, of  course.  When I was ten, I wanted to  marry a handsome  Englishman.  And how about now?    Now I love a handsome American. But I still don't  know what I'm going to do  with the rest of my life.

3、压码学习---  What were you doing while。。。句式:

    Well? How old was Rita when  she wanted to marry a handsome  Englishman ? Ten.

      Now listen and repeat.

      the love of my life
      I was looking for the love of my  life   
      while I was looking for the love  of my life
      what were you doing
      What were you doing while I was  looking for the love of my life?
      What were you doing while I was  looking for the love of my life?

4、引导学习----合并复合句:

      I say, "You do. . . I look for the  love of my life." And you say. . .  What were you doing while I was  looking for the love of my life?  I say, "You think. . . I talk to  Mike." And you say. . .  What were you thinking while I  was talking to Mike?  All right. Here we go.

5、练习----完型填空完成复合句:
  You do  . . . I look for the love of my  life.        What were you doing while I was looking for the love of my  life?
    You think. . . I talk to Mike.  What were you thinking while I  was talking to Mike?
    They look for . . . you watch the  tape.  What were they looking for while you were watching the      tape?   
  You sing. . . you work.    What were you singing while you  were working?   
  They talk about. . . they eat  lunch.      What were they talking about  while they were eating lunch?
  You wonder. . . we interview  James Morgan.      What were you wondering while  we were interviewing James Morgan?   
  You dream about. . . you sleep.    What were you dreaming about  while you were sleeping?

    Parcel.  Package. Mail a package. Post a parcel.
    Mailbox. Letter box.  Mail a package in a mailbox.  Post a parcel in a letter box.
    I'm not going on vacation. I'm not going on holiday.

四、场景学习-----英美英语单词用法的差异:

1、引导语----英国人说法Do  you know what 。。。:

  Good. Now listen to the conversation between Jake and  James Morgan. Listen for how  the British sometimes say "Do  you know what time it is?"

2、情景----英国与美国同样语言的用法区别:

  Did you know that Terry's  grandfather was a barrister in London?      Oh, what's a barrister?  You don't know what a  barrister is, Jake?  A barrister is a sort of lawyer,  I think.  Oh, that's right.  Why don't you make life a lot easier and just say  "lawyer"? We do sometimes.  And this business about a "single" for a one-way ticket.  Very tricky. If you asked for a  "single" at a train station . . . Railway station, Jake.  OK. At a railway station. If  you ask for a "single" here,  they'd think you wanted a  room in a hotel.  A bit confusing, isn't it? Oh,  I think I'm late for the  broadcast. I say, have you got  the time?      Huh? I've got plenty of time.  Oh, sorry. I mean, do you know what time it is?  Who says we speak the same  language?   

3、学习----Do you know  what 。。与  Have you got 。。。句式:

  OK. How do the British  sometimes say "Do you know  what time it is?"
  Have you got the time?
  In general, the British use the  form Have you got where the
  Americans use Do you have.  Listen. 


  Have you got any change?  And.. .      Do you have any change?
  These two questions mean the  same thing.

Listen and repeat.

  Have you got any change?
  Have you got any change?

  Do you have any change?
  Do you have any change?

4、引导学习---两种表达式:

    Let's practice these two forms.  You hear. . .  Have you got any change?  And you say . . .    Do you have any change?  You hear. . .  Do you have a cigarette?  And you say . . .  Have you got a cigarette?  OK? Let's begin.

5、练习 Have you got 与  Do you have:

  Have you got any change?    Do you have any change?
  Do you have a cigarette?    Have you got a cigarette?
    Do you have a light?  Have you got a light?
  Have you got any pets?  Do you have any pets?
  Have you got a minute?    Do you have a minute?
  Do you have a kiss for me?    Have you got a kiss for me?

五、场景学习-----英美单词用法:

1、引导语:
  Now listen to Chris as she  watches one of James Morgan's  tapes. Listen for how the British  say "mailbox."

2、情景---英美差异:

    You'll need to post a small  parcel in the letter box.  Have you got any change?  You'll need it for stamps. . .  James Morgan! I know how  to mail a package in a  mailbox. How did you get on  my shelf? . . .    Have you got any pets?  Please don't bring them.  I haven't got any pets. And  I'm not going on holiday  because I haven't got any  money. I haven't got any time either.

3、学习:

  Well? How do the British say  "mailbox"?  Letter box.

  OK. Now listen and repeat.


  parcel    post a small parcel
  in a letter box
  Post a small parcel in a letter box.   
  Post a small parcel in a letter box.

  package mail a small package in a mailbox
  Mail a small package in a mailbox.
  Mail a small package in a mailbox.

    go on holiday    go on holiday
  go on vacation  go on vacation

4、引导学习--- Parcel--Package:

    Now you hear. .. Parcel.  And you say. . . Package. You hear.. Mail a package. And you say. . .Post a parcel. All right. Let's go.

5、练习----美语语英语句子表达式:

  Parcel.  Package. Mail a package. Post a parcel.
    Mailbox. Letter box.  Mail a package in a mailbox.  Post a parcel in a letter box.
    I'm not going on vacation. I'm not going on holiday.

    That's all for now. And that's the end of Lesson Eleven.


sunyuting1 2007-10-29 06:07
第十册复习四

一、基本词组:
filling out
reading articles about
are wondering if
can be included as
if the expenses for
to think about while
while you listen.

will be repeated
in between for you to
Can payments to
to baby-sitters be
to relatives be
Will Peter need
Are Steven and Anne
What is the deadline for
you'll need to
It says here that
Can payments to ...
things like ...even payments to ...who take
I would think so
He sure is
Are you planning to
Remember that
must have
The main reason for
it seems
Can you imagine if
What will people think
It says here that
expected to ask for
I don't know.
I'd better talk  to
let's see if
Yes, they can.
No, he won't.
Yes, he will.
No, they aren't.
To prevent
What is the deadline

he'd  better talk to
Won't you
will see  you
won't be long.
in a bit  of a hurry
It'll only be
Won't you have ...while  you wait
How many .. does  ... have
    Won't you
    Won't you have
    Won't you help
    Won't you hurry up
    Won't you be
    Won't you leave
    Won't you be

二、基本句子:
1、
It says here that child-care expenses can be deducted. . . things like payments to baby-sitters,    daycare centers, even payments to relatives who take care of a child. Well, that's good news.But can little Peter be included as a dependent?  I would think so. I mean, he is a dependent, isn't he?  Yeah. He sure is. Wait a minute. Listen to this: "Children Now Need Social Security Numbers. Are you planning to include children as dependents on your tax return this year?" Yeah. That's us. "Remember that each child  over five must have a Social Security number." That isn't us. Peter's not even six months old. The main reason for this requirement, it seems, is to prevent two divorced parents from listing the same child as a dependent.  Can you imagine if we were divorced and each of us  listed Peter as a dependent? What will people think of next !  It says here that thousands of people are expected to ask for Social Security numbers for their children  in the week before April 15, the deadline for sending in tax returns.  But what about Peter? Can  we list him as a dependent?  I don't know. I'd better talk  to an accountant.

  Can payments to baby-sitters be deducted?  Yes, they can.
  Can payments to relatives be deducted? Yes, they can.
. Will Peter need a Social Security number this year? No, he won't.
  Will Peter need a Social Security number in five years? Yes, he will.
    Are Steven and Anne divorced?  No, they aren't.
    Why do children need a Social Security number?    To prevent divorced parents  from listing the same child as a dependent.
  What is the deadline for sending in tax returns?  April 15.

2、
  Won't you sit down,  Mr  ?    Winn. Steven Winn.  W - i - n - n. I have  an appointment. Ah, yes. Of course.  Won't you sit down,  Mr. Winn? The accountant will see  you in a minute.  She's busy right now.  She won't be long.  Thanks. I'm in a bit  of a hurry. I have  only a few questions and.. .  It'll only be a minute,  Mr. Winn. This is  our busy season.  Won't you have a  cup of coffee while  you wait?  Yes, I will. Thanks.

    Won't you have a cup of coffee? 
  Sit down !    Won't you sit down? 
    Have a cup of coffee ! Won't you have a cup of coffee? 
    Help yourself !  Won't you help yourself?
    Hurry up ! Won't you hurry up? 
    Be a little patient ! Won't you be a little patient? 
    Leave me alone !  Won't you leave me alone? 
    Be nice to me ! Won't you be nice to me?


三、场景学习:

  1、引导语:
    Review Four. For this lesson,you'll need a pencil and a piece of paper.
    Steven is filling out his income tax return.  He's reading articles about the new tax laws.  He and Anne are wondering if little Peter can be included as a dependent,  and if the expenses for Peter's care can be deducted. Here are some questions for you to think about while you listen.
    Take a piece of paper and a pencil and write each question down. Each question will be repeated twice with a pause in between for you to write. Ready?

  2、提问问题:
    Question One.  Can payments to baby-sitters be deducted?  Can payments to baby-sitters be deducted?
    Question Two.  Can payments to relatives be deducted?Can payments to relatives be deducted?
    Question Three. Will Peter need a Social Security number this year? Will Peter need a Social Security  number this year?
    Question Four.  Will Peter need a Social Security number in five years? Will Peter need a Social Security  number in five years?
    Question Five.  Are Steven and Anne divorced?  Are Steven and Anne divorced?
    Question Six.    Why do children need a Social Security number?  Why do children need a Social  Security number?
    Question Seven.    What is the deadline for sending in tax returns?  What is the deadline for sending in tax returns?

    3、引导语:

    Now listen carefully to the conversation and write down the important information you'll need to answer the questions.

  4、情景:
    It says here that child-care expenses can be deducted. . . things like payments to baby-sitters,    daycare centers, even payments to relatives who take care of a child.
Well, that's good news.But can little Peter be included as a dependent?  I would think so. I mean, he is a dependent, isn't he?
Yeah. He sure is. Wait a minute. Listen to this: "Children Now Need Social Security Numbers. Are you planning to include children as dependents on your tax return this year?"
Yeah. That's us.
"Remember that each child  over five must have a Social Security number."
That isn't us. Peter's not even six months old.
The main reason for this requirement, it seems, is to prevent two divorced parents from listing the same child as a dependent. 
Can you imagine if we were divorced and each of us  listed Peter as a dependent? What will people think of next !
It says here that thousands of people are expected to ask for Social Security numbers for their children  in the week before April 15, the deadline for sending in tax returns.
But what about Peter? Can  we list him as a dependent?
I don't know. I'd better talk  to an accountant.

  5、引导语:

  Now let's see if you can answer the questions. Give short answers. Ready? Here we go.

  6、回答问题信息:

    Question One.  Can payments to baby-sitters be  deducted? Yes, they can.
    Question Two.  Can payments to relatives be  deducted?  Yes, they can.
    Question Three.  Will Peter need a Social Security number this year? No, he won't.
    Question Four.  Will Peter need a Social Security  number in five years? Yes, he will.
    Question Five.  Are Steven and Anne divorced? No, they aren't.
    Question Six.    Why do children need a Social Security number?  To prevent divorced parents  from listing the same child as a dependent.
    Question Seven.  What is the deadline for sending in tax returns? April 15.

  四、情景学习:
    1、引导语:
  Steven has some questions about  his tax returns. He decides he'd  better talk to an accountant. At  the accountant's office,  a receptionist  invites  him to sit  down.  Listen for how many questions Steven has.

    2、情境:

          Won't you sit down,  Mr  ?    Winn. Steven Winn.  W - i - n - n. I have  an appointment. Ah, yes. Of course.  Won't you sit down,  Mr. Winn? The accountant will see  you in a minute.  She's busy right now.  She won't be long.  Thanks. I'm in a bit  of a hurry. I have  only a few questions and.. .  It'll only be a minute,  Mr. Winn. This is  our busy season.  Won't you have a  cup of coffee while  you wait?  Yes, I will. Thanks.

    3、学习:

    OK. How many questions does  Steven have for the accountant?  Only a few.


    Now listen and repeat.

  sit down   

  Won't you sit down?

  Won't you sit down?

  have a cup of coffee

  Won't you have a cup of coffee?

  Won't you have a cup of coffee?

  4、引导学习:

      "Won't you sit down" is a very  polite way of asking someone to sit down. Let's practice this expression. You hear. . .  Sit down !      And you say . . .  Won't you sit down?  You hear. . .  Have a cup of coffee !    And you say. . .  Won't you have a cup of coffee?  OK? Here we go.

    5、练习:

      Sit down !    Won't you sit down? 
    Have a cup of coffee ! Won't you have a cup of coffee? 
    Help yourself !  Won't you help yourself?
    Hurry up ! Won't you hurry up? 
    Be a little patient ! Won't you be a little patient? 
    Leave me alone !  Won't you leave me alone? 
    Be nice to me ! Won't you be nice to me?

    This is the end of Review Four.
 


sunyuting1 2007-10-29 06:41
第十册 第十二课练习

一、基本词组:
person who's been
wondering what
She knows
What was I doing when 
I'm not sure what
I was  doing when
I  know what
I was doing when 
I was talking to
But what was
He wasn't watching
While everyone was  ...,
I  went out to see if ...
I could find  ...
wandering  around ,,,
. I just saw ....
I'm sure he'll be telling ...
what he  was doing.
  I wonder what ...
There's something here that ... . .
Something's  bothering me.

What did Terry do while  ...
He went out to see if ...
While ...., I went out.
When I went out
everyone was  watching

  When ... I was talking to ....While I was... Rita's  tape...
  When I saw ... I was  wandering ... While I was wandering ..., I saw ...
  When he heard ..., he was  thinking ... While he was thinking ..., he heard ....
    When she remembered ..., she was checking....While she was ..., she remembered ....
  When the lights went out ..., I was waiting for ....While I was waiting ..., the lights went  out ...
  When they landed ..,  I was living in ....While I was living in ..., they  landed ....

    talking to Mike about
  what's going on
  Listen carefully for what ...

  I wish
we could find out
what's going on
  don't you,
I mean, it's  ..
  Was I really that...
  I'm so embarrassed.
  I feel just  terrible.
    Oh, come on.
    I was just  kidding.
  Actually,
  you were
  Better than ...you see ..
  I've got to go to
  Why don't you ...
  It'll take your mind off ...
    Exactly when will you be  ...
  I'll be  picking up ..
  then I'll be coming ... 
  Exactly when will you be ..
  No later than two,
  I promise  . . .
  It'll do you ..
  Won't you be
  I'd like to see ..while  I'm ...
What will Mike be ...
  when will you be ..
  Exactly when will ..

    I've got to go to ...
  Exactly when will you be ...
  I've got to .. . .  Exactly when will you be
coming  back

    I've got to -- Exactly when will you be ...
  come back-- coming back
    pick up ---picking up
    talk to --- talking to
    take my vacation--- taking  your vacation
    take singing lessons--takin singing lessons
  got to end--be  ending

  The exercise is .., but we will be ...
  talking to ... about
  What time ...


  So, you're off to ...  Will you be ..
  No, I won't.
    Rita will be .. She's  upset
    about  what happened ...
  I  thought
    We won't be
    enough to
    pick up
    Just to
    Won't you be
  taking her out to
    Rita  mentioned that
    she'd like  to go to...
  I'll be expecting you

  going alone   
  Will you be
  No, I won't.   
  taking her out
  Won't you be
  Yes, I will. 

  The difference between
  affirmative questions
  for  example. . . 
  Will you be going
  negative questions,
  Won't you be taking her 
  Is that for
  expects a positive  response
"Yes, I will."
For affirmative questions
doesn't have ...what to  expect.
  Will you be going alone
  give the negative response . . .
  No, I won't. 
    Won't you be taking
  give the positive  response .
  Yes, I will. 


二、基本句子:
  When I went out, everyone was  watching the monitor.
    While everyone was watching  the monitor, I went out.
  When Rita's tape came on the  air, I was talking to her.
  While I was talking to her, Rita's  tape came on the air.
    When I saw Jake, I was  wandering around the station.
  While I was wandering around the station, I saw Jake.
  When he heard her sing, he was  thinking about Rita.
  While he was thinking about  Rita, he heard her sing.
  When she remembered the glove, she was checking the tape.
    While she was checking the tape, she remembered the glove.
  When the lights went out in New York, I was waiting for a subway at Times Square.
  While I was waiting for a subway  at Times Square, the lights went  out in New York.
  When they landed on the moon,  I was living in Rome.
    While I was living in Rome, they  landed on the moon.


  I've got to go to New York.  Exactly when will you be going?
  I've got to come back.    Exactly when will you be coming
  back?
  I've got to pick up the tapes.    Exactly when will you be picking up the tapes?
    I've got to talk to Steven.  Exactly when will you be talking to Steven?
    I've got to take my vacation.  Exactly when will you be taking  your vacation?
  I've got to take singing lessons.  Exactly when will you be taking  singing lessons?
    This exercise has got to end.  Exactly when will this exercise be  ending?


  Will you be going alone? No, I won't.
    Won't you be taking her out to  lunch? Yes, I will.
    Will they be staying in New  York overnight?  No, they won't.
    Won't he be needing them in  the studio tomorrow?  Yes, he will.
    Won't she be going out with  Terry tonight?  Yes, she will.
    Will he be waiting for her at the  station with flowers?  No, he won't.
    Will we be ending this lesson  later this evening? No, we won't.

三、场景学习:

  1、引导语:
    Welcome to Lesson Twelve. Chris  is watching the tape of her  interview with Terry. She thinks  that Terry might be the person who's been making all the trouble  at WEFL. She's wondering what Terry was doing after the tapes  came on. She knows he wasn't  watching the monitor. Listen for  what Terry did while everyone  was watching the monitor.

  2、情景:

    What was I doing when  Rita's travel tape came on?  I'm not sure what I was  doing when it happened. I  know what I was doing when  Rita's singing lesson came on  the air. I was talking to her  in the studio.
  But what was Terry doing after the tapes came on? He wasn't watching the  monitor. He wasn't working  in the editing room. . .  Let's see the interview again.
    While everyone was  watching the monitor, I  went out to see if I could find  anybody strange wandering  around the station. I just saw  Jake. I'm sure he'll be telling  Detective Modine what he  was doing.
  I wonder what that means.  There's something here that  I'm missing. . . Something's  bothering me.

  3、学习:

  OK. What did Terry do while  everyone was watching the monitor?  He went out to see if he could  find anybody strange wandering around the station.

    Now listen and repeat.

  the monitor

  everyone was watching the monitor

  while everyone was watching the monitor

  I went out

  While everyone was watching  the monitor, I went out.

  While everyone was watching  the monitor, I went out.

  4、引导学习:
    Now you hear. . .  When I went out, everyone was  watching the monitor.    And you say. . .    While everyone was watching  the monitor, I went out.    You hear. . .    When Rita's tape came on the air, I was talking to her.    And you say . . .  While I was talking to her, Rita's  tape came on the air.  Ready? Let's go.

  5、练习:

    When I went out, everyone was  watching the monitor.
    While everyone was watching  the monitor, I went out.
  When Rita's tape came on the  air, I was talking to her.
  While I was talking to her, Rita's  tape came on the air.
    When I saw Jake, I was  wandering around the station.
  While I was wandering around the station, I saw Jake.
  When he heard her sing, he was  thinking about Rita.
  While he was thinking about  Rita, he heard her sing.
  When she remembered the glove, she was checking the tape.
    While she was checking the tape, she remembered the glove.
  When the lights went out in  New York, I was waiting for a subway at Times Square.
  While I was waiting for a subway  at Times Square, the lights went  out in New York.
  When they landed on the moon,  I was living in Rome.
    While I was living in Rome, they  landed on the moon.

四、场景学习:

1、引导语:

  Rita's talking to Mike about  what's going on at WEFL, the  strange trouble with the tapes.  Listen to their conversation. Listen carefully for what Mike  will be picking up in New York.

2、情景:

  I wish we could find out  what's going on around here,  don't you, Mike? I mean, it's  really awful.
  What? Your singing lesson on  the air?  Yeah. Was I really that bad?  I'm so embarrassed. I feel just  terrible.  Oh, come on. I was just  kidding. Actually, you were  pretty good. Better than a lot  of stuff you see on TV. Listen,  I've got to go to New York.  Why don't you come with  me? It'll take your mind off  things.    Exactly when will you be  going?  At about eleven. I'll be  picking up some new tapes,  and then I'll be coming right  back.  Exactly when will you be coming back, Mike?    No later than two, I promise  . . . Come on, Rita. It'll do  you good.  No later than two, huh?  Won't you be staying longer?  I'd like to see a movie while  I'm there.    OK. OK. Let's go.

  3、学习:

  OK. What will Mike be picking  up in New York?  Some new tapes.

  Now listen and repeat.

    when will you be going
  Exactly when will you be going?
  Exactly when will you be going?
  when will you be coming back
  Exactly when will you be coming  back?
  Exactly when will you be coming  back?

  4、引导学习:

  Now you hear. . .  I've got to go to New York.  And you say . . .  Exactly when will you be going?    You hear. . .  I've got to come back.  And you say . . .  Exactly when will you be coming  back?  All right. Here we go.

  5、练习:

  I've got to go to New York.  Exactly when will you be going?
  I've got to come back.    Exactly when will you be coming
  back?
  I've got to pick up the tapes.    Exactly when will you be picking up the tapes?
    I've got to talk to Steven.  Exactly when will you be talking to Steven?
    I've got to take my vacation.  Exactly when will you be taking  your vacation?
  I've got to take singing lessons.  Exactly when will you be taking  singing lessons?
    This exercise has got to end.  Exactly when will this exercise be  ending?

五、场景学习:

  1、引导语:

  The exercise is ending right now, but we will be continuing  the lesson. Mike is talking to  Steven about going to New  York. What time does Steven  expect Mike to be back in Stamford? Listen.

  2、情景:

  So, you're off to New York.  Will you be going alone?    No, I won't. Rita will be coming with me. She's  upset about what happened  the other night, and I  thought she needed to get away. We won't be staying  long. Just long enough to pick up the tapes and. . .  Just to pick up the tapes?  Come on, Mike. Won't you be taking her out to lunch  or something? Well, yes, I will. And Rita  mentioned that she'd like  to go to a movie. Good! I'll be expecting you  two back in Stamford no  earlier than eight 0' clock.

  3、学习:

    OK. Does Steven expect Mike  and Rita to be back in Stamford  in the afternoon or the evening?  In the evening.

  Now listen and repeat.

  going alone   
  Will you be going alone?
  Will you be going alone?

  No, I won't.   
  No, I won't.   

  taking her out to lunch
  Won't you be taking her out to  lunch?   
  Won't you be taking her out to lunch?   

    Yes, I will.    Yes, I will.

  4、引导学习:

  The difference between affirmative questions, for  example. . .      Will you be going alone?  And negative questions, for  example. . .      Won't you be taking her out to lunch?   
  Is that for negative questions,  the speaker expects a positive  response: "Yes, I will." For affirmative questions, the speaker  doesn't have any idea what to  expect. Let's practice these  responses. You hear. . .
  Will you be going alone?  And you give the negative response . . .      No, I won't.      You hear. . .    Won't you be taking her out to  lunch?    And you give the positive  response . Yes, I will.  All right. Let's begin.

  5、练习:

    Will you be going alone? No, I won't.
    Won't you be taking her out to  lunch? Yes, I will.
    Will they be staying in New  York overnight?  No, they won't.
    Won't he be needing them in  the studio tomorrow?  Yes, he will.
    Won't she be going out with  Terry tonight?  Yes, she will.
    Will he be waiting for her at the  station with flowers?  No, he won't.
    Will we be ending this lesson  later this evening? No, we won't.

  In fact, the lesson ends right now. This is the end of Lesson Twelve.

185


sunyuting1 2007-11-02 08:30
正在辅导整理的压码听懂学习内容,移动到压码听懂学习板块。大家注意学习每日更新修改的互动磁带课文整理内容。


sunyuting1 2007-11-04 06:40
第十册的互动磁带文本压码听懂练习范例整理完毕。


sunyuting1 2007-11-07 17:34
培训学员每日学习的压码听懂范例。


堂堂正正做人 2007-11-12 06:22
谢谢老师
描述
快速回复

您目前还是游客,请 登录注册